Class: XII

Chemistry
Minimum learning material and sample papers
SYLLABUS FOR SESSION 2024-25

Unit I: Solutions (7 marks) 10 Periods

Types of solutions, expression of concentration of solutions of solids in liquids, solubility
of gases in liquids, solid solutions, Raoult's law, colligative properties - relative lowering of
vapour pressure, elevation of boiling point, depression of freezing point, osmotic pressure,
determination of molecular masses using colligative properties, abnormal molecular mass,
Van't Hoff factor.
Unit II: Electrochemistry (9 marks) 12 Periods
Redox reactions, EMF of a cell, standard electrode potential, Nernst equation and its
application to chemical cells, Relation between Gibbs energy change and EMF of a cell,
conductance in electrolytic solutions, specific and molar conductivity, variations of
conductivity with concentration, Kohlrausch's Law, electrolysis and law of electrolysis
(elementary idea), dry cell-electrolytic cells and Galvanic cells, lead accumulator, fuel cells,
corrosion.
Unit III: Chemical Kinetics (7 marks) 10 Periods
Rate of a reaction (Average and instantaneous), factors affecting rate of reaction:
concentration, temperature, catalyst; order and molecularity of a reaction, rate law and
specific rate constant, integrated rate equations and half-life (only for zero and first order
reactions), concept of collision theory (elementary idea, no mathematical treatment),
activation energy, Arrhenius equation.
Unit IV: d and f Block Elements (7 marks) 12 Periods
General introduction, electronic configuration, occurrence and characteristics of
transition metals, general trends in properties of the first-row transition metals – metallic
character, ionization enthalpy, oxidation states, ionic radii, colour, catalytic property,
magnetic property, interstitial compounds, alloy formation, preparation and properties of
K2Cr2O7 and KMnO4. Lanthanoids – Electronic configuration, oxidation states, chemical
reactivity and lanthanoid contraction and its consequences. Actinoids - Electronic
configuration, oxidation states and comparison with lanthanoids.
Unit V: Coordination Compounds (7 marks) 12 Periods
1|Page
Coordination compounds - Introduction, ligands, coordination number, colour, magnetic
properties and shapes, IUPAC nomenclature of mononuclear coordination compounds.
Bonding, Werner's theory, VBT, and CFT; structure and stereoisomerism, the importance
of coordination compounds (in qualitative analysis, extraction of metals and biological
system).

2|Page
Unit VI: Haloalkanes and Haloarenes. (6 marks) 10 Periods
Haloalkanes: Nomenclature, nature of C–X bond, physical and chemical properties, optical
rotation mechanism of substitution reactions. Haloarenes: Nature of C–X bond,
substitution reactions (Directive influence of halogen in monosubstituted compounds
only). Uses and environmental effects of - dichloromethane, trichloromethane,
tetrachloromethane, iodoform, freons, DDT.
Unit VII: Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers (6 marks) 10 Periods
Alcohols: Nomenclature, methods of preparation, physical and chemical properties (of
primary alcohols only), identification of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols,
mechanism of dehydration, uses with special reference to methanol and ethanol. Phenols:
Nomenclature, methods of preparation, physical and chemical properties, acidic nature of
phenol, electrophilic substitution reactions, uses of phenols. Ethers: Nomenclature,
methods of preparation, physical and chemical properties, uses.
Unit VIII: Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids (8 marks) 10 Periods
Aldehydes and Ketones: Nomenclature, nature of carbonyl group, methods of preparation,
physical and chemical properties, mechanism of nucleophilic addition, reactivity of alpha
hydrogen in aldehydes, uses. Carboxylic Acids: Nomenclature, acidic nature, methods of
preparation, physical and chemical properties; uses.
Unit IX: Amines (6 marks) 10 Periods
Amines: Nomenclature, classification, structure, methods of preparation, physical and
chemical properties, uses, identification of primary, secondary and tertiary amines.
Diazonium salts: Preparation, chemical reactions and importance in synthetic organic
chemistry.
Unit X: Biomolecules (7 marks) 12 Periods
Carbohydrates - Classification (aldoses and ketoses), monosaccharides (glucose and
fructose), D-L configuration oligosaccharides (sucrose, lactose, maltose), polysaccharides
(starch, cellulose, glycogen); Importance of carbohydrates. Proteins -Elementary idea of -
amino acids, peptide bond, polypeptides, proteins, structure of proteins - primary,
secondary, tertiary structure and quaternary structures (qualitative idea only),
denaturation of proteins; enzymes. Hormones - Elementary idea excluding structure.
Vitamins - Classification and functions. Nucleic Acids: DNA and RNA.

3|Page
 INDEX
SL.NO CHAPTERS PAGE NO

1 SOLUTIONS 05-18

2 ELECTROCHEMISTRY 19-32

3 CHEMICAL KINETICS 33-47

4 d & f BLOCK ELEMENTS 48-59

5 COORDINATION COMPOUNDS 60-74

6 HALOALKANES AND HALOARENES 74-90

7 ALCOHOLS, PHENOLS AND ETHERS 91-112

ALDEHYDES, KETONES AND

8 113-132
CARBOXYLIC ACIDS

9 AMINES 133-143

10 BIOMOLECULES 144-155

11 SAMPLE PAPER-I 156-167

12 SAMPLE PAPER-II 168-177

13 SAMPLE PAPER-III 178 – 191

4|Page
 1. SOLUTIONS
QUICK REVISION POINTS:
It is a homogenous mixture of solute and solvent. (Solute + Solvent=Solution)
Types of solutions: -

EXPRESSING CONCENTRATION OF SOLUTIONS

Some basic formulae: -
Mass percentage. Mole fraction Molarity (M) =
w/w% For solvent XA=nA/nA+nB no. of moles of
For solute XB=nB/nA+nB solute/volume of solution (L)
XA+ XB = 1 Unit=mole/litre [mol/L]
ppm (parts per million)=
Molality (m) =
For liquid solutions % no. of moles of solute/mass
v/v= of solvent(kg)
mass of solute
(WB)x106/total mass of Unit=mole/Kilogram
𝑉�\�Y�b�Z�R �\�S �`�\�Y�b�a�R(𝑉�5) [mol/kg]
𝑉�\�Y�b�Z�R �\�S �`�\�Y�b�a𝑖�\�[(𝑉𝐴 + 𝑉𝐴) solution (WA+WB)

NOTE:, mole fraction, mass percentage, ppm and molality are independent of
temperature, whereas molarity depends on temperature. This is because volume
depends on temperature.
SOLUBILITY (maximum amount of solute present in a specific amount of solvent at a
specified temperature) of gas depends on:

Nature of Pressure Temperature and Solubility of gas

gas
Easily Increases with increases with decrease in temperature,
liquefiable, increase in aquatic species are more comfortable in cold water
Easy to pressure rather than in warm water and prefer to stay at
dissolve (HENRY’S LAW) lower level away from the upper layer of water in
summers.
Henry’s law: -

5|Page
 To avoid BENDS, the tanks used by scuba divers are filled with air diluted with helium
(less soluble than N2)
ANOXIA problem at higher altitudes due to low pressure low concentration of O2 in Blood
cells.
Vapour pressure: -The pressure exerted by the vapours in the equilibrium with liquid at
a given temperature.

For two volatile liquids For one non-volatile and one volatile
liquid
PA = P0AΧA PB = P0BΧB PA = P0AΧA PB =0
Dalton’s partial pressure Dalton’s partial pressure
PTotal= P0AΧA+ PB0ΧB PTotal= P0A(1-XB)+ PB0ΧB PTotal= P0AΧA+0 PTotal= P0AΧA

Composition of vapour phase in equilibrium with the solution: PA = PtotalYA PB =

PtotalYB
Raoult’s law: - The partial vapour pressure of each component in the solution is directly
proportional to its mole fraction. [ PA  X A and PB  X B ]
Ideal solutions Non-Ideal solutions
Obeys Raoult’s law over the entire range of Don’t Obey Raoult’s law
concentration
e.g. Solution of n-hexane and n-heptane
A-A , B-B = A-B interactions A-A , B-B ≠ A-B interactions
PTotal= PA+ PB PTotal= P0AΧA+ PB0ΧB PTotal≠ PA+ PB PTotal≠ P0AΧA+ PB0ΧB
Δmix H= 0 Δmix V = 0 Δmix H≠ 0, Δmix V ≠ 0
Can be separated by fractional distillation Cannot be separated by fractional
distillation
Non-Ideal solutions
Positive deviation Negative deviation
PTotal > PA+ PB ΔVmix=+ve ΔHmix=+ve PTotal< PA+ PB ΔVmix=-ve ΔHmix=-
ve
A – B interaction is weaker than A – A and B – B A – B interaction is stronger than
interactions. A – A and B – B interaction
Minimum boiling Azeotrope* Maximum boiling Azeotrope
e.g. water + alcohol e.g. water+ HNO3
Azeotrope* (Greek: boiling without change) Mixtures having same composition in liquid
and vapour phase, boil ata constant temperature and cannot be separated by fractional
distillation.

6|Page
Colligative properties: - The properties of solutions which depend only on the number
of particles of the solute (molecules or ions) dissolved in a definite amount of the solvent
and do not depend on the nature of solute.

Relative lowering Elevation in boiling Depression in Osmosis

in point freezing point
vapour pressure
poA-ps/poA=XB ΔTb =Tb-𝑻𝒐 ΔTf =Tf-𝑻𝑶 π=CRT
𝒃 𝒇

ΔTb=Kb m ΔTf = Kf m π=n/V×RT

The net spontaneous

flow of the solvent
molecules from the

Kb = molal elevation Kf = molal solvent to the solution or

or EBULLIOSCOPIC depression or from a less concentrated

constant. It is the CRYOSCOPIC solution to a more

elevation in boiling constant. It is the concentrated solution

[for a very dilute point of 1 molal depression in through a
solution solution. freezing point of 1 semipermeable
nB << nA ] Kb = molal solution. membrane is called
�@𝑅�G2⁄ Kf =
�O 1000𝑋 H OSMOSIS.
�]�\ − �] �[ �d2/�@ �@𝑅�G2
1 1
= 2
= 2 �c�N�] �S⁄1000𝑋 H The excess pressure on
�]�\1 �[1 �d1/�@1 �S�b�`
solution side which just
prevents the flow of
solvent molecules is
called OSMOTIC
PRESSURE.

Condition: pressure higher than the osmotic

pressure is applied on the solution
The solvent will flow from the solution into the
pure solvent through the semi-permeable
membrane(cellulose acetate)
Used in desalination of sea water,

Osmosis in plants and animal cells:

Two solutions having same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic
solutions.
When such solutions are separated by semipermeable membrane no osmosis occurs
between them.

7|Page
Two solutions having different osmotic pressure at a given temperature, the one with
lower osmotic pressure is called hypotonic solution and another one with higher
osmotic pressure is called
hypertonic solution

IMPORTANT POINTS:
Antifreeze agent: ethylene glycol used in car radiators at hill stations (Depression in
freezing point)
De-icing agents: common salt (NaCl) or calcium chloride (CaCl2) is scattered on the
roads to melt ice in cold countries (Depression in freezing point)
Biological and Industrial importance of osmosis:
• In animals, circulation of water to all parts of body takes place due to osmosis.
• Plant roots absorb water from soil due to osmosis. Concentration of cell sap inside
the root hair cells is higher than that of water present in the soil. Water enters the
root cells due to endosmosis.
• Water absorbed by plant roots is circulated in the entire plant body and reaches to
the top of a tall tree due to osmosis.
• Osmosis helps in plant growth and germination of seeds.
• Red blood cells burst when placed in water; it is due to endosmosis.
• Various functions of plants are controlled by osmosis, e.g., stretching of leaves and
flowers, opening and closing of flowers.
• Use of salt and sugar in pickles and jams acts as preservatives. It prevents growth
of bacteria and fungi by osmosis.
• Dead bodies swell under water due to endosmosis.
• When dried fruits and vegetables are placed in water, they slowly swell and return
to the original form. It is again due to the endosmosis of water into the fruits and
vegetables.
• Edema: Due to excess intake of salt by a person, the tissues become puffy, it is
called edema. It is due to retention of water in the tissue owing to osmosis.
• The preservation of meat by salting and of fruits by adding sugar protects against
bacterial action. Through the process of osmosis, a bacterium on salted meat or
candid fruit loses water, shrivels and dies.
The osmotic pressure method has got advantages over other colligative properties:
The measurement of osmotic pressure is around the room temperature, gives large
measurable values for molar masses and molarity of the solution is used instead of
molality.
Conditions for normal molar mass (Accurate value)
Solute must be non-volatile, Solution must be dilute and solute should not undergo any
association or dissociation in the solution (non-electrolyte solution).
Abnormal molar mass: ELECTROLYTIC SOLUTIONS: - When the molar mass of a
substance (solute) become higher or lower after its association or dissociation in the
solution it is called abnormal molar mass.

8|Page
Van’t Hoff factor: i = normal molar mass/abnormal(observed)molar mass
Colligative property after abnormal
PROPERTY ASSOCIATION DISSOCIATIO
molar masses: -
N
Lowering of vapour pressure: - No. of Less more
molecules
XB = i poA-ps/poA
Colligative Lowers Increases
Elevation in boiling point: - property
Molar mass Greater than lesser
ΔTb=i Kb m
theoretical
Depression in freezing point: - value
i=1 i Less than 1 i More than 1
ΔTf = i Kf m 𝑖−1 𝑖−1
(extent)
=degree of 1 �[ − 1
Osmotic pressure: - π=iCRT −1
dissociation / �[ [n = no. of
association [n = no. of dissociated
particles particles.]
associated]
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARK)
1 KH value for Ar(g), CO2(g), HCHO (g) and CH4(g) are 40.39, 1.67, 1.83 × 10-5 and
0.413 respectively. Arrange these gases in the order of their increasing solubility.
a) HCHO < CH4 < CO2 < Ar b) HCHO < CO2 < CH4 < Ar
c) Ar < CO2 < CH4 < HCHO d) Ar < CH4 < CO2 < HCHO
2 When a non-volatile solid is added to pure water it will:
a) boil above 100oC and freeze above 0oC b) boil below 100oC and freeze
above 0 Co

c) boil above 100oC and freeze below 0oC d) boil below 100oC and freeze
below 0 Co

3 Water- HCl mixture

I. shows positive deviations II. forms minimum boiling azeotrope
III. shows negative deviations IV. forms maximum boiling azeotrope
a) I and II b) II and III
c) I and IV d) III and IV
4 An azeotropic solution of two liquids has boiling point lower than either of them
when solute solvent interactions are:
a) Equal to solute solute and solvent solvent interactions
b) Stronger than solute solute and solvent solvent interactions
c) Weaker than solute solute and solvent solvent interactions
d) None of the above
5 Molarity of a solution at 60oC is ---------- than molarity at 30oC
a) More b) less c) same d) no effect of temperature
6 For isotonic solutions which of the following is not equal
a) concentration b) temperature c) osmotic pressure d) vapour
pressure
7 For non-electrolyte solute value of Van’t Hoff factor is
a) 0 b) 1 c) >1 d) <1
8 In reverse osmosis:
a) a pressure greater than osmotic pressure is applied on pure water side
b) a pressure lesser than osmotic pressure is applied on pure water side
c) a pressure greater than osmotic pressure is applied on salt water side
d) a pressure lesser than osmotic pressure is applied on salt water side

9|Page
9 Which of the following salt will have same value of Van’t Hoff’s factor (i) as that of
K4[Fe (CN)6]
(a) Al2(SO4)3 (b) NaCl (c) Al(NO3)3 (d) Na2SO4
10 Pure benzene has vapour pressure three times that of pure toluene. They form
nearly ideal solution. What would be the ratio of their mole fractions in the vapour
phase of a solution having equal mole fractions of benzene and toluene.
a) 1 b) 2/3 c) 3 d) 1/3
ANSWERS
1 (a), 2 (a), 3 (d), 4 (c), 5 (b), 6 (d), 7 (b), 8 (c), 9 (a) , 10 (c)
ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS (1 MARK)
Note: In the following questions (1-5) a statement of assertion followed by a
statement of reason is given. Choose the correct answer out of the following
choices.
(a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is the correct
explanation for assertion.
(b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but the reason is not a
correct explanation for assertion.
(c) Assertion is a correct statement but the reason is the wrong statement.
(d) Assertion is a wrong statement but the reason is a correct statement.
1 Assertion: When methyl alcohol is added to water, the boiling point
of water decreases.
Reason: When a volatile solute is added to a volatile solvent elevation in boiling
point is observed.
2 Assertion: Cooking time in pressure cooker is reduced
Reason: Boiling point inside the pressure cooker is raised
3 Assertion: Vapour pressure of a liquid is constant at a constant temperature
Reason: At equilibrium rate of evaporation becomes equal to the rate of
condensation.
4 Assertion: The components of azeotropic mixture can be separated by distillation
Reason: At a particular composition azeotropic mixture boil at the same
temperature.
5 Assertion: The shrinking of cells is called hemolysis.
Reason: Hemolysis occurs when cell comes in contact with solution of lower
osmotic pressure than that of cell
ANSWERS
1 (c), 2 (a) , 3 (a) , 4 (d) , 5 (d)
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS 1 mark Type:
Q1 Give an example of a solid solution in which solute is a liquid
Ans Amalgam of mercury with sodium
Q 2 Suggest the most important type of intermolecular attractive interaction between
methanol and acetone
Ans Both methanol and acetone are polar. So, the intermolecular interactions between
them are dipole – dipole interactions
Q 3 X and Y liquids on mixing produces cold solution. What type of deviation is shown
by them?
Ans Positive deviation
Q 4 Aquatic species are more comfortable in cold waters rather than in warm waters.
Give reason.
Ans Solubility of gases increases with decrease in temperature as it is an exothermic
process.

10 | P a g e
Q 5 If is α the degree of dissociation of Na2SO4, calculate Van't Hoff factor to determine
the molecular mass.
Ans 1+2α
Q 6 Give an example of a substance that can be used as a SPM.
Ans Pig’s bladder or parchment or cellophane.
Q 7. What happens when blood cells are placed in a solution containing more than 0.9%
(mass/volume) sodium chloride?
Ans Water will flow out of the cells and they would shrink
Q 8 People taking lot of salt experience puffiness or swelling of the body. Why ?
Ans People taking lot of salt experience puffiness or swelling of the body due to water
retention in tissue cells and intercellular spaces because of osmosis.
Q 9 What are hypotonic solutions?
Ans A solution which has lower osmotic pressure than the other solution separated by a
semipermeable membrane is called hypotonic solution
Q 10 How can the direction of osmosis be reversed?
Ans The direction of osmosis can be reversed if a pressure larger than the osmotic
pressure is applied to the solution side.
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
1 a) Common salt and Calcium chloride are used to clear snow on the roads, both
are of almost same cost but sodium chloride is preferred. Why?
b) How the freezing point changes when mercuric iodide is added to the aqueous
solution of potassium iodide?
Ans a) NaCl is needed in lesser quantity.
b) Freezing point is raised as no. of particles decreases which results in decrease
in colligative property.
2 a) Write the expression for degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte AxBy in
terms of Van’t Hoff factor.
b) Name a substance that can be used in radiators of vehicles in places where the
temperature is less than zero.
Ans a)  = i-1/(x+y-1) b) Ethylene glycol
3 a) How the osmotic pressure of 5 % aqueous solution of glucose (𝜋1) is related to
that of 5 % aqueous solution of urea (𝜋2)?
b) Why do salt water fish die when they are suddenly transferred to a fresh water
aquarium?
Ans a) 𝜋1< 𝜋2
b) Water from aquarium enters in cell causing them to expand and get ruptured.
4 a) Two 500 ml beakers were taken. One filled with 400ml water marked ‘X’ and
another with 400ml of 2M NaCl solution marked ‘Y’. At the same temperature
both were placed in closed containers of same material and same capacity, in
which container the vapour pressure is less.
b) Out of 1M sucrose and 1M urea solution which has more osmotic pressure?
Ans a) Y
b) Both have osmotic pressure.
5 a) Sia’s father is suffering from high blood pressure but he is advised to consume
less quantity of common salt. Why?
b) Two solutions A and B are separated by semi-permeable membrane. If the
liquid flows from A to B then which solution is more concentrated?
Ans a) More salt use will increase ions in the body fluid which increases blood
pressure
b) B
6 a) Why the colligative property of an electrolyte solution is always greater than
that of a non-electrolyte solution?

11 | P a g e
 b) Mohit wants to put an egg with outer shell removed in a bottle but he is unable
to do so as mouth of bottle is slightly smaller. Suggest one method to help him
putting the peeled egg in the bottle
Ans a) Due to dissociation of electrolyte the number of ions increases
b) Peeled egg shrinks in saturated brine solution.
7 a) Out of 1M and 2M sugar solutions which one has a lower boiling point?
b) While performing practical it is directed that the bottle of liquid ammonia is to
be cooled before opening the seal but Suman forgot to cool it before opening.
What consequence she faced?
a) 1M (higher the concentration of solute added higher is the colligative property)
Ans b) It is cooled to lower down the pressure of ammonia else the gas will bump out
of the bottle.
8 a) What is the effect of temperature on the process when shrunk and dried
vegetables are placed in water?
b) The boiling point of 0.2 mol kg–1 solution of X in water is greater than
equimolal solution of Y in water. Which one is undergoing dissociation in
water?
Ans a) Process will be accelerated with increase in temperature as osmosis becomes
faster with increase in temperature.
b) X
9 a) What is the unit of Ebullioscopic constant?
b) Which type of deviation is shown by Carbon tetrachloride and chloroform
mixture?
Ans a) K kg mol-1 or K (molality)-1
b) positive deviation
10 a) What is the significance of Henry’s Law constant KH?
b) How the colligative properties change if the solute undergo dissociation in
solution?
Ans a) Henry’s Law constant (KH) helps in comparing the relative solubilities of different
gases in the same solvent (e.g. water). In general, the lesser the value of KH, the
more the solubility of a gas.
b) increases due to increase in number of particles on dissociation.
SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)
1 a) If the elevation in boiling point of a solution for which i = 1 in a solvent (Kf =x K
kg mol-1 and Kb=y K kg mol-1) is z K,then calculate the depression in freezing point
of the same concentration.
b) Give two examples of materials used for making semi permeable membrane for
carrying out reverse osmosis.
Ans a) z x/y
b) Cellulose acetate, potassium ferrocyanide
2 a) What is the degree of dissociation for 0.1M Ba (NO3)2 if i(Van’t Hoff factor) is 2.74
b) Arrange the following solutions in increasing order of Van’t Hoff factor.
0.1M CaCl2, 0.1M KCl, 0.1M C12H22O11, 0.1 M Al2(SO4)3
Ans a)  = 𝑖−1
�[−1
 = 87%
b) 0.1M C12H22O11 < 0.1M KCl < 0.1M CaCl2 < 0.1 M Al2(SO4)3
3 a) Molal elevation constant for benzene is 2.52 K/m. A solution of some organic
substance in benzene boils at 0.126oC higher than benzene. What is the molality of
the solution?
b) What are the values of Van’t Hoff factor for NaCl and K2SO4, respectively?
Ans a) ΔTb= Kb m, molality=0.05m
b) 2 and 3

12 | P a g e
4 a) State Henry’s law.
b) Which cold drink you prefer one chilled or other one at room temperature and
why?
c) At the same temperature hydrogen is more soluble in water than Helium. Which
of them will have higher value of KH and why?
Ans a) Mole fraction of gas in the solution is directly proportional to partial pressure of
gas in the vapour phase
b) Chilled as solubility of CO2 is more at low temp.
c) Helium as greater the KH value lower the solubility
5 a) Account for the reason, marine life like fish prefers to stay at lower level and stay
away from the upper layer of water.
b) Why freezing/melting point of a substance used as a criterion for testing the
purity of a substance?
c) Account for the reason for preservation of fruits against bacterial action by adding
sugar.
Ans a) Temperature is higher in upper layer so solubility of oxygen is less
b) M.P./F.P. changes due to impurities.
c) Bacterium in canned fruit loses water through the process of osmosis, shrivels
and dies.
LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)
1 a) If boiling point of an aqueous solution containing a non-volatile solute is
100.15oC. What is its freezing point? Given latent heat of fusion and vapourisation
of water are 80cal/g and 540 cal/g respectively.
b) Electrolyte A gives 4 ions and B is a non-electrolyte. If 0.1 molar solution of solute
B produces an osmotic pressure ‘p’, then 0.02 molar solution of A will produce how
much osmotic pressure?
Ans 𝑅×�@1×�G2 𝑅×�@1×�G2�O
�S
a) ΔTb =Kb m, ΔTf=Kf m 𝐾�S = 𝐾�O =
1000×∆�S�b�`�; 1000×∆�c�N�]�;
�G2 𝑋 �Y�N�a�R�[�a ℎ�R�N�a �\�S �S�b�`𝑖�\�[
Kf/Kb= �S = ΔTf/ ΔTb
�G�O2𝑋 �Y�N�a�R�[�a ℎ�R�N�a �\�S �c�N�]�\�b�_𝑖�`�N�a𝑖�\�[
ΔTf= 0.542 Tf=0-0.542=-0.542oC
b) 0.8p
2 a) 0.6 mL of acetic acid �6�;3�6�B�B�;, having density 1.06 g/mL, is dissolved in 1 litre
of water. The depression in freezing point observed for this strength of acid was
0.0205°C. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and the dissociation constant of acid. 𝐾�S=
1.86 K kg /mol.
b) How does Raoult’s law become a special case of Henry’s law?
Ans a) First find out number of moles of acetic acid, mass of acetic acid =volume x
density
mass of acetic acid=0.6 X 1.06= 0.636 g and molar mass of acetic acid = 60 g/
mol
�Z�N�`�` �\�S �N�P�R�a𝑖�P �N�P𝑖�Q 0.636
�[�\. �\�S �Z�\�Y�R�` �\�S �N�P�R�a𝑖�P �N�P𝑖�Q = = 0.0106
�Z�\�Y�N�_ �Z�N�`�` �\�S �N�P�R�a𝑖�P �N�P𝑖�Q 60
�A�\. �\�S �Z�\�Y�R�` 0.0106
�Z�\�Y�N�Y𝑖�a𝑦 = = = 0.0106 �Z (As density of water = 1 g/�P�Z3) ∴ 1 �? =
�Z�N�`�` �\�S �`�\�Y�c�R�[�a 1
1𝑘�T)
0.0205
∆�G�S = 𝑖 𝐾�S �Z 𝑖 = 1.86×0.0106 = 1.04
𝑖−1 1.04−1
𝛼= = = 0.04 As n=2, �6�; �6�B�B�; ⇋ �6�; �6�B�B− + �;+
�[−1 2−1 3 3
Dissociation constant 𝐾 = [�6�;3�6�B�B−][�;+] �P𝛼 × �P𝛼 �P𝛼2 0.0106 ×0.04×0.04
�N = = = = 1.76 × 10−5
[�6�;3�6�B�B�;] �P(1−𝛼) 1−𝛼 1−0.04
b) In two laws only the proportionality constant KH differs from PA0. Thus,
Raoult’s law becomes a special case of Henry's law in which KH = PA0

13 | P a g e
CASE BASED QUESTIONS (4 MARKS)
Read the passage given below and answer the following case-based questions:

Q1. Boiling point or freezing point of liquid solution would be affected by the dissolved
solids in the liquid phase. A soluble solid in solution has the effect of raising its
boiling point and depressing its freezing point. The addition of non-volatile
substances to a solvent decreases the vapor pressure and the added solute particles
affect the formation of pure solvent crystals. According to many researches the
decrease in freezing point directly correlated to the concentration of solutes
dissolved in the solvent. This phenomenon is expressed as freezing point depression
and it is useful for several applications such as freeze concentration of liquid food
and to find the molar mass of an unknown solute in the solution. Freeze
concentration is a high-quality liquid food concentration method where water is
removed by forming ice crystals. This is done by cooling the liquid food below the
freezing point of the solution. The freezing point depression is referred as a
colligative property and it is proportional to the molar concentration of the solution
(m), along with vapor pressure relative lowering, boiling point elevation, and osmotic
pressure. These are physical characteristics of solutions that depend only on the
identity of the solvent and the concentration of the solute. The characters are not
depending on the solute’s identity.
(Jayawardena, J. A. E. C., Vanniarachchi, M. P. G., & Wansapala, M. A. J. (2017).
Freezing point depression of different Sucrose solutions and
coconut water.)
a What is the relation between vapour pressure of solid and liquid states at freezing
point?
b Why freezing point of 0.1m solution of acetic acid in benzene is less than freezing
point of 0.01m solution?
c Out of the following 0.10 m aqueous solutions, which one will exhibit the largest
freezing point depression? KCl , C6H12O6 , Al2(SO4)3 , K2SO4
OR
c If Kf for water is 1.86 oC/m, explain why 1m NaCl in water does not have a
freezing point equal to a) -1.86 oC b) -3.72oC
ANS Q1
a Equal
b Depression in FP in 0.1m solution is more than 0.01 solution so FP of first is less.
c C6H12O6
OR
c a) as there are 2 moles of ions per mol of NaCl
b) degree of ionisation is not 100% at freezing point due to stronger interactions for
1m solution.
Q2 1. Henna is investigating the melting point of different salt solutions. She makes a

salt solution using 10 mL of water with a known mass of NaCl salt. She puts the
salt solution into a freezer and leaves it to freeze. She takes the frozen salt solution

14 | P a g e
 out of the freezer and measures the temperature when the frozen salt solution
melts. She repeats each experiment.
Assuming the melting point of pure water as 0oC, answer the following questions:
(a) One temperature in the second set of results does not fit in the pattern. Which
temperature is that? Justify your answer. 1
(b) Why did Henna collect two sets of results? 1
(c) In place of NaCl, if Henna had used glucose, what would have been the melting
point of the solution with 0.6 g glucose in it? 2
OR
(c) What is the predicted melting point if 1.2 g of salt is added to 10 mL of water?
Justify your answer.

Ans- a) 3rd reading for 0.5 g there has to be an increase in depression of freezing point
Q2 and therefore decrease in freezing point so also decrease in melting point when
amount of salt is increased but the trend is not followed in this case.
b) Two sets of reading help to avoid error in data collection and give more objective
data.
c.) ΔTf (glucose) = 1 x Kf x 0.6 x 1000 /180x 10 ...................... (1)
ΔTf (NaCl) = 2 x Kf x 0.6 x 1000 / 58.5x10
3.8 = 2 x Kf x 0.6 x 1000 /58.5x 10 .............................. (2)
Divide equation 1 by 2
ΔTf (glucose)/ 3.8 = 58.5/ 2 x 180
ΔTf (glucose) = 0.62
Freezing point or Melting point = - 0.62 oC
OR
depression in freezing point is directly proportional to molality (mass of solute
when
the amount of solvent remains same)
0.3 g depression is 1.9 oC
0.6 g depression is 3.8 oC
1.2 g depression will be 3.8 x2 = 7.6 oC

Q3 Aarav Sharma is very fond of a special drink made by his grandmother using
different fruits available in their hometown. It has an outstanding taste and also
provides great health benefits of natural fruits. He thought of utilizing his
grandmother recipe to create a new product in the beverage market that provide
health benefits and also contain fizziness of various soft drinks available in the
market. Based on your understanding of solutions chapter, help Aarav Sharma to
accomplish his idea by answering following:
(a) How he can add fizz to the special drink made by his grandmother? 1
(b) What is the law stated in the chapter that can help Aarav to make his drink
fizzy? 1
(c) What precautions he should take while bottling so that his product does not
lose fizz during storage and handling across long distances? 2
OR

15 | P a g e
 (c)The mole fraction of helium in a saturated solution at 20°C is 1.2 x 10-6. Find
the pressure of helium above the solution. Given Henry’s constant at 20°C is
144.97 kbar.
Ans- a) Carbon dioxide is a gas which provides fizz and tangy flavour. He can dissolve
Q3 Carbon dioxide gas in the drink.
b) Henry’s law which states that solubility of a gas in liquid is directly proportional
to partial pressure of the gas.
(c) Bottles should be sealed under high pressure of CO and capping should be done
perfectly to avoid leakage of CO2 as any loss of partial pressure will result into
decrease in solubility.
OR
(c) pHe = KH x XHe

= (144.97 x 103bar)( 1.2 x 10-6 )

= 0.174 bar
Q4 Observe the table in which azeotropic mixtures are given along with their boiling
points of pure Components and azeotropes and answer the questions that follow.

(a) What type of deviation is shown by minimum boiling azeotropes? 1

OR
(a) Why does H2O and HCl mixture form maximum boiling azeotropes? 1
(b) What are azeotropes?
(c) Give one example of ideal solution. What type of liquids form ideal solutions? 2
Ans- (a) Positive deviation from Raoult’s law.
Q4 OR
(a) It is because force of attraction between H2O and HCl is more than H2O-H2O and
HCl-HCl.
(b) Azeotropes- Binary mixtures having same composition in liquid and vapour
phase and boil at a constant temperature.
(c) Hexane and heptane form ideal solution. Those compounds of same family
having similar forces of attraction form ideal solution.
Q5 Boiling point or freezing point of liquid solution would be affected by the dissolved
solids in the liquid phase. A soluble solid in solution has the effect of raising its
boiling point and depressing its freezing point. The addition of non-volatile
substances to a solvent decreases the vapor pressure and the added solute particles
affect the formation of pure solvent crystals According to many researches the
decrease in freezing point directly correlated to the concentration of solutes
dissolved in the solvent. This phenomenon is expressed as freezing point depression

16 | P a g e
 and it is useful for several applications such as freeze concentration of liquid food
and to find the molar mass of an unknown solute in the solution.
Freeze concentration is a high-quality liquid food concentration method where
water is removed by forming ice crystals, this is done by cooling the liquid food
below the freezing point of the solution. The freezing point depression is referred as
a colligative property and it is proportional to the molar concentration of the
solution (m), along with vapour pressure lowering boiling point elevation, and
osmotic pressure. These are physical characteristics of solutions that depend only
on the identity of the solvent and the concentration of the solute. The characters
are not depending on the solute's identity.
(Source: Jayawardena, J. A. E. C., Vanniarachchi, M. P. G., & Wansapala, M. A. J.
(2017). Freezing point depression of different Sucrose solutions and coconut water)
a. Four samples BaCl , NaCl, ZnCl and AICI of 0.5 M are being boiled Which of
2 2 3

the among will show highest elevation in boiling point?

b. How does sprinkling of salt help in clearing the snow-covered
roads in hilly areas?
c. The freezing point of nitrobenzene is 278.8 K. When 2.8 g of an unknown
substance is dissolved in 100 g of nitrobenzene, the freezing point of solution is
found 276.8 K. If the freezing point depression of nitrobenzene is 8.0 K kg mol , -1

what is the molar mass of unknown substance? [ Kf=8 KKgmol-1for nitrobenzene]

OR
C.A solution prepared by dissolving 2g of oil of wintergreen (methyl salicylate) in
100.0 g of benzene has a boiling point of 80. 31° C. Determine the molar mass of
this compound. (B.P. of benzene - 80.10°C and Kb for benzene 2.520 C kg mol ) -1

Ans a. AlCl3
Q5 b. By depression of freezing point (it lowers freezing point of water less than 0
C)
c. ΔTf = i kf m
2=1x 8 x (2.8/Mb )x1000/100 =8x2.8x10/Mb
Mb=8x28/2=8x14=112g/mol
OR
ΔTb = i kb m
0.21= 1x 2.52x2x1000/100xMb
Mb= 2.52x2x10/0.21=240 g/mol

17 | P a g e
18 | P a g e
 2. ELECTROCHEMISTRY
Quick Revision Points
Electrochemistry: the study of production of electricity from energy released during
spontaneous chemical reactions and the use of electrical energy to bring about non-
spontaneous chemical reactions.
Differences Between
Galvanic cell or Voltaic cell or Electrolytic cell
electrochemical cell
A device in which electric current A device in which a nonspontaneous
(electrical energy) is generated from chemical reaction is carried with the help
spontaneous redox chemical reaction of electric current (electrical energy).
(chemical energy)
eg: Daniel cell, dry cell, lead storage eg : electrolysis of molten NaCl,
battery electrolysis of dilute aq.H2SO4 solution
using Pt electrode

.
Electrochemical cell e.g., Daniel cell
The overall cell reaction is:
Zn(s) + Cu2+ (aq) → Zn2+ (aq) + Cu(s)
The Daniel cell is represented as :

Zn(s)| Zn2+(aq)(C1) || Cu2+(aq) (C2)| Cu(s)

Left side Salt bridge Right side
Oxidation half reaction Reduction half reaction
Anode Cathode
Negative terminal Positive terminal

Salt Bridge and Its Functions: It consists of a glass

U-tube containing semi-solid paste of either KCl,
KNO3 or NH4Cl (inert electrolytes) in gelatine or agar-
agar jelly. It helps in flow of ions by completing the
circuit and maintains electrical neutrality.

Electrode potential and Cell potential (Ecell) Electromotive

standard electrode potential force(emf)
Electrode potential (Eelectrode) Difference between the Cell potential when no
A potential difference which electrode potential of the current is drawn
develops between the electrode cathode and anode. through the cell
(Metal rod) and the electrolyte (Measured in Volts
(solution containing metal ion). Ecell = Eright – Eleft
standard electrode potential Ecell = Ecathode – Eanode
( E°electrode) standard cell potential
When concentrations of all the E0cell = E0cathode – E0anode
species involved in a half-cell is
unity and temperature is at
298 K, then the electrode
potential is known as standard
electrode potential

19 | P a g e
Note: It is a common practice to express all the electrode potentials as reduction
potentials.
Reduction potential = - Oxidation potential.

Reversibility of Daniel Cell:

Measurement of electrode potential: SHE (Standard Hydrogen electrode) is used as a

reference electrode to measure the standard electrode potential of other electrodes by
assigning standard electrode potential of SHE is zero. It consists of Pt electrode coated
with Pt black, in acidic solution of 1M H + ion concentration at 1 bar Pressure and 298 K
temperature.
Example: (i) When SHE is coupled with Zn, Pt(s) | H2(g, 1bar) || Zn2+(aq, 1M) | Zn(s)
EMF of the above cell = 0.76 V so E° Zn+2 / Zn =-0.76V
(ii) When SHE is couples with Cu, Pt(s) | H2(g, 1bar) || Cu2+(aq, 1M) | Cu(s)
EMF of the above cell = 0.34 V so E° Cu+2/ Cu = +0.32V

Nernst equation: It is an equation which gives the relationship between electrode

potential and the concentration of ions in electrolytic solution. For an electrode reaction
(reduction reaction),
Mn+ (aq) + ne– → M(s), Nernst equation can be written as:
�\ 𝑅�G [M]
�8M�[+/M = �8M�[+/M − ln
�[�9 [M�[+]
2.303𝑅�G 1
�8M�[+ /M = �8�\ �[+ − log
M /M �[�9 [M�[+]
�\
where, �8M�[+/M = Electrode potential, �8M�[+/M = Standard electrode potential R = 8.314JK /mol,
T = Temperature in kelvin, n = No. of electrons gained, F = Faraday constant (96500 C /mol)

Substituting the value of R and F we get

�\ 0.0591 1
�8M�[+/M = �8M�[+/M − log at 298 K
�[ [M�[+]

Thus, the electrode potential increases with increase in concentration of ions.

For electrochemical cell , Nernst equation can be given as:

at 298 K, �8 ∘ 0.0591 [Product]

cell = �8cell − log
�[ [ Reactant]

20 | P a g e
For example, (i) Nernst equation for Daniel cell (Zn – Cu cell) can be written as:

o 0.059 [Zn2+]
�8(cell) = �8(cell) − log
2 [Cu2+]
(ii) Nernst equation for Ni – Ag cell
Ni(s)|Ni2+(aq) ∥ Ag+(aq)|Ag(s)
The cell reaction is Ni(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Ni2+(aq) + 2Ag(s)
The Nernst equation can be written as
o 0.059 [Ni2+]
�8(cell) = �8(cell) − log
2 [Ag+]2
Equilibrium Constant from Nernst Equation:
At equilibrium, E = 0, then [Zn 2+] = 𝐾
cell �P
0.0591 [Cu2+]
In general, �8∘ = log 𝐾 or, log 𝐾 �[ ∘
�8cell
cell �[ �P �P = 0.0591

Electrochemical cell and Gibbs Free Energy:

The work done by a reversible galvanic cell is equal to decrease in its free energy.
Mathematically, Δr�: = −�[�9�8cell
If concentration of all the reacting∘ species is unity, then,
�8cell = �8 and we get, Δ�_�:�\ = −�[�9�8∘
cell cell
From Δ�_�:�\, we can calculate the equilibrium constant of a reaction,

Δ�_�:�\ = −𝑅�Gln 𝐾�P or Δ�_�:�\ = −2.303𝑅�Glog 𝐾�P

Maximum work = Δ�_�:�\

Electrochemical Series: The arrangement of various standard half-cells/electrodes in

the order of their decreasing standard reduction potential values is known as
electrochemical series.

Metallic and Electrolytic Conductance

S. Metallic Conductance Electrolytic Conductance
No.

Movement of electrons is responsible for Movement of ions is

(i)
conduction. responsible for conduction.

Matter moves in the form of

(ii) Does not involve transfer of matter.
ions.
Increases with increase in
Decreases with increase in temperature
temperature due to decrease in
(iii) as kernels start vibrating which produce
interionic attraction or increase
hindrance in the flow of electrons.
in movement of ions
Electrolytic or ionic
Metallic conductance depends upon - conductance depends upon -
Nature and structure of the metal, Nature of electrolyte or
iii)
Number of valence electrons per atom interionic attractions, Solvation
and Temperature of ions, Nature of solvent and
its viscosity, and Temperature

21 | P a g e
Conductance of Electrolytic solutions:
Resistance (R) - Obstruction to the flow of current, R = ρ l/A, Its SI unit is ohm.

Resistivity (ρ) - electrical resistance of a conductor of unit cross-sectional area and unit
length.
ρ = R A /l, Its SI unit is ohm metre.

Property Formula Units Effect of dilution

Increases as larger
1 𝐴 𝜅𝐴 number of ions are
Ohm−1(Ω−1)/
Conductance (�:) = = produced or due to
𝑅 ��Y �Y Siemens (S)
increase in movement of
ions
Specific
�Y Decreases as number of
conductance (𝜅, 1 or �: Sm−1 ions per unit volume of
kappa) or � 𝐴
solution decreases.
conductivity

Increases with dilution

Molar conductivity 𝜅 × 𝑉 or
1000 S cm2 mol–1 due to large increase in
(𝚲�Z)
𝜅× 𝑉.
�@

Conductivity( 𝜅)=conductance(G) X cell constant (G*)

Coductivity is defined as conductance of unit volume of electrolytic solution.

Molar conductivity is defined as conductance of sufficient volume of the electrolytic

solution that contains one mole of the electrolyte.

Cell Constant is defined as the ratio of the distance between the two electrodes to their
area of cross section. Its SI unit is m-1

Limiting molar conductivity: When concentration approaches zero i.e., at infinite

dilution, the molar conductivity is known as limiting molar conductivity (Λ° m).

Variation Molar Conductivity with Concentration:

For a strong electrolyte it is shown by Debye–Huckel Onsager equation:
Λm = Λ°m – AC1/2, Here, Λ°m = Molar conductivity at infinite dilution (Limiting molar
conductivity)
Λm = Molar conductivity at given concentration, A = Constant which depends upon nature
of solvent and temperature, C = Concentration.

For weak electrolytes: molar conductivity

increases steeply on dilution or decrease in
concentration due to increase in the number
of ions or increase in degree of dissociation.

For a strong electrolyte: molar conductivity

increases slowly on dilution or decrease in

22 | P a g e
concentration due to increase in the movement of ions. There is only a small increase in
conductance with dilution. (This is because a strong electrolyte is completely dissociated
in solution, so the number of ions remain constant and on dilution, interionic attractions
decrease as ions move far apart.)

Kohlrausch’s Law: It states that the limiting molar conductivity of an electrolyte can be
represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and cation of the
electrolyte.
In general, if an electrolyte on dissociation gives �c+cations and �c−anions then its limiting
molar conductivity is given by 𝚲0 = �c �0 + �c �0
�Z + + − −
Here, � and � are the limiting molar conductivities of cations and anions, respectively.
∘ ∘
+ −

Applications of Kohlrausch’s law:

(a) Calculation of molar conductivities of weak electrolyte at infinite dilution: For example,
molar conductivity of acetic acid (weak acid) at infinite dilution can be obtained from the
knowledge of molar conductivities at infinite dilution of strong electrolytes like
HCl,
∘
CH3COONa∘and NaCl as ∘
illustrated below:
𝚲m(CH3COOH) = �CH3COO− + �H∗
o o o o o o
= [�CH3COO− + �Na+] + [�H+ + �Cl− ] − [�Na+ + �Cl− ]
i.e., 𝚲o ( ) = 𝚲�\ ( ) + 𝚲o − 𝚲o
�Z CH3COOH m CH3COONa m(HCl) m(NaCl)
(b) Determination of degree of dissociation of weak electrolytes:
𝚲�P�Z
Degree of dissociation (𝛼) = 𝚲�\�Z
(c) Determination of dissociation constant (𝐾) of weak electrolytes:
�P𝛼2
𝐾 =
1−𝛼

Electrolytic cell and electrolysis: Electrolysis is the process of decomposition of an

electrolyte by passing electricity through its aqueous solution or molten state.
Criteria for product formation: At cathode, when there is competition between many
cations or many reduction reactions, then the reduction reaction with higher E 0 value is
preferred. Similarly at anode, the oxidation reaction with lower E0 value is preferred.

Products of Electrolysis:
Products Reactions involved

Electrolyte
At At
At cathode At anode
cathode anode

+ + �R− 1
Molten Na Cl2 Na(�Y)
metal gas Cl−(�Y) → 2(�T) �R
Cl + −
NaCl → Na(�Y) 2

H2O(�Y) + �R−
Aqueous Cl2 1 1
H2 gas → H2(�T) Cl−(�N�^) → Cl + �R−
NaCl gas 2 2 2(�T)
+ OH−
(�N�^)

H+(�N�T) + �R− 2H2O(�Y)

O2 → O2(�T) + 4H+
Dil. H2SO4 H2 gas 1
gas → H2(�T)
(�N�^)
2 + 4�R−

23 | P a g e
 H(�N�^)
+ + �R− 2SO2−
Conc. S2O2−
H2 gas 8
1 4(�N�^)
→ S2O2−(�N�^) + 2�R−
H2SO4 → H2(�T) 8
2
AgNO3(aq)-
Ag+(aq) + e-
Ag Ag Ag+ Ag(s) → Ag+(aq) + e-
→ Ag(s)
electrode

AgNO3(aq)-
O2 Ag+(aq) + e- 2H2O(l) → O2(g) +
Pt Ag
gas → Ag(s) 4H+(aq) + 4e-
electrode

CuCl2(aq)- Cu O2 Cu+2(aq) + 2H2O(l) → O2(g) +

Pt gas 2e- → Cu(s) 4H+(aq) + 4e-
electrode

Overvoltage/Over potential: Oxidation of H2O is relatively slow process and thus needs
extra potential. This extra potential needed to oxidise H 2O is called overvoltage/over
potential. Due to overvoltage, the oxidation of chloride ion occurs at anode in preference
to H2O.

Faraday’s first law of electrolysis: The amount of chemical reaction which occurs at any
electrode during electrolysis is proportional to the quantity of electricity passed through
the electrolyte. m=ZQ,
m = Z × I × t, where Z = Electrochemical equivalent =M/nF where n= no of electrons or
valency, F=96487, M= molar mass of the metal

Faraday’s second law of electrolysis: Amount of various substances liberated by the

same quantity of electricity passed through the electrolytic solution is proportional to their
chemical equivalent weights. W1/E1 = W2/E2

Battery: Combination of galvanic cells in series and used as a source of electrical energy.
(i)Primary batteries are non-chargeable batteries such as Leclanche cell and Dry cell.
(ii) Secondary batteries are chargeable cells involving reversible reaction. Example, Lead
storage battery and Nickel-cadmium cells.

Dry cell (Leclanche cell): The anode consists of a zinc container and the cathode is a
graphite electrode surrounded by powdered MnO2 and C. The space is filled with paste of
NH4Cl and ZnCl2.
At anode: Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e– At cathode: MnO2 (s) + NH4+(aq)+ 2e– →
MnO(OH) + NH3
The net reaction: Zn + NH4+(aq) + MnO2 → Zn2+ + MnO(OH) +NH3

Mercury cell: consists of zinc–mercury amalgam as anode and a paste of HgO and
carbon as the cathode. The electrolyte is a paste of KOH and ZnO. The electrode
reactions are:
Anode: Zn(Hg) + 2OH-→ ZnO(s) + H2O + 2e – Cathode: HgO(s) + H2O + 2e- →
Hg (l) + 2OH–
The cell potential is approximately 1.35 V and remains constant as the ionic
concentration of the solution is not changed during its life

Lead storage battery: Anode - Spongy lead Cathode - Lead packed with Lead dioxide
Electrolyte -Aqueous solution of H2 SO4 (38%)
Discharge reaction of cell:
At anode : Pb(s) +SO42–(aq) → PbSO4 (s) +2e–

24 | P a g e
At cathode: PbO2 filled in lead grid gets reduced to Pb2+ ions which combines with SO4 2–
ions to form PbSO4 (s). The reaction is PbO2 (s) + 4H+(aq) + SO42–(aq) + 2e– → PbSO4 (s) +
2H2O(l)
Complete cell reaction: Pb(s) + PbO2 (s) + 2H2 SO4 (aq) → 2PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O(l)
Recharge reaction of cell (charging): It changes the direction of electrode reaction.
PbSO4 accumulated at cathode gets reduced to Pb.
Overall Reaction: PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2 (s) + 2H2SO4 (aq)

Nickel–cadmium cell which has longer life than the lead storage cell but is costly. Here,
the overall reaction during discharging: Cd(s) + 2Ni(OH) 3 (s)→ CdO(s) + 2Ni(OH)2 (s) +
H2O(l)

Fuel cells: Electrical cells that are designated to convert the energy from the combustion
of fuels such as hydrogen, carbon monoxide or methane directly into electrical energy are
called fuel cells. the cell reactions are:
Anode: 2H2 (g) + 4OH– (aq) → 4H2 O (l) + 4e-, Cathode: O2 (g) + 2H2 O(l) + 4e– → 4OH–
(aq)
Net reaction: 2H2 (g) + O2 (g) →2H2O (l)
Advantages: high efficiency, free from pollution (eco-friendly),continuous source of
energy

Corrosion: The process of slow conversion of metals into their undesirable compounds
(usually oxide) by reaction with moisture and other gases present in the atmosphere.
Rusting of iron:
Oxidation: Fe(s) → Fe+2 (aq) + 2e-, Reduction: O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4e-→ 2H2O(l)
Atmospheric oxidation: 2Fe (s) + ½ O2 (g) + 2H2O(l) → Fe2O3 + 4H+(aq)
+2
Fe2O3 + xH2O → Fe2O3.xH2O(rust)
Prevention of Corrosion:
(i)Barrier protection: By covering the surface with paint or a thin film of grease or by
some chemicals (eg-bisphenol).
(ii) Sacrificial protection: Sn, Zn (by galvanization), sacrificial anode- Mg, Zn (iii)
Alloying

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)

Q1. Which metal is used as electrode which do not participate in the reaction but
provides surface for conduction of electrons? (a) Cu (b) Pt (c) Zn (d) Fe
Q2. An electrochemical cell can behave like an electrolytic cell when
(a) Ecell = 0 (b) Ecell > Eext (c) Eext > Ecell
(d) Ecell = Eext
Q3. 4. Which cell will measure standard electrode potential of copper electrode?
(a) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 0.1 bar)| H+ (aq., 1 M) | | Cu2+ (aq., 1M)| Cu(s)
(b) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 1 bar) | H+ (aq., 1 M) | | Cu2+ (aq., 2M)| Cu(s)
(c) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 1 bar) | H+ (aq., 1 M) | | Cu2+ (aq., 1M)| Cu(s)
(d) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 1 bar) | H+ (aq., 0.1 M)| | Cu2+ (aq., 1M)| Cu(s)
Q4. The positive value of the standard electrode potential of Cu2+/Cu indicates that
(a) this redox couple is a stronger reducing agent than the H+ /H2 couple.
(b) this redox couple is a stronger oxidising agent than H+ /H2.
(c) Cu can displace H2 from acid.
(d) Cu can displace H2 from acid
Q5. On increasing temperature,
(a) ionic conductance increases and electronic conductance decreases.

25 | P a g e
(b) ionic conductance decreases and electronic conductance increases.
(c) both ionic and electronic conductance increase.
(d) both ionic and electronic conductance decrease.
Q6. The electrolyte used in the mercury cell is
(a) paste of NH4Cl and ZnCl2 (b) paste of HgO and carbon
(c) paste of KOH and ZnO (d) paste of PbO and H2SO4
Q7. A device that converts energy of combustion of fuels like hydrogen and methane
directly into electrical energy is known as:
(a) dynamo (b) Ni-Cd cell (c) fuel cell (d)
electrolytic cell
Q8. Which one of the following is always true about the spontaneous cell reaction in a
galvanic cell?
(a) E° cell > 0, ΔG° < 0, Q >KC (b) E° cell < 0, ΔG° < 0, Q <KC
(c) E° cell > 0, ΔG° > 0, Q >KC (d) E° cell > 0, ΔG° < 0, Q <KC
Q9. Charge carried by 1 mole of electrons is
(a) 6.023 × 1023 coulomb (b) 9.65 × 104 coulomb
(c) 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb (d) 6.28 × 1019 coulomb
Q10. To calculate the standard emf of the cell, which of the following options is correct if
E° is reduction potential values?
(a) emf = E°cathode – E°anode (b) emf = E°anode – E°cathode
(c) emf = E°anode + E°cathode (d) None of these
Answers : 1(b), 2(c), 3(c), 4(b), 5(a), 6(c), 7(c), 8(d), 9(b), 10(a)
ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARKS)
Given below are two statements labelled as Assertion (A) and Reason (R)
Select the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c. A is true but R is false.
d. A is false but R is true.
Q1. Assertion (A) : Ecell should have a positive value for the cell to function.
Reason(R) : Ecathode < Eanode
Q2. Assertion (A) : Copper sulphate cannot be stored in zinc vessel.
Reason (R) : Zinc is less reactive than copper.
Q3. Assertion (A) : Current stops flowing when Ecell = 0.
Reason (R) : Equilibrium of the cell reaction is attained.
Q4. Assertion (A) : Conductivity of all electrolytes decreases on dilution.
Reason (R) : On dilution number of ions per unit volume decreases.
Q5. Assertion (A) : Conductivity decreases for weak electrolyte and increases for strong
electrolyte with decrease in concentration.
Reason (R) : On dilution, the number of ions per unit volume that carry the
current decreases.
Answers: 1( c), 2( c), 3(a), 4(a), 5(d)

26 | P a g e
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
Q1. In the plot of molar conductivity (Λm) vs square root of concentration (C1/2), following
curves are obtained for two electrolytes A and B.

Answer the following:

(i) Predict the nature of electrolytes A and B.
(ii) What happens on extrapolation of Λm to concentration approaching zero for electrolytes
A and B?
Ans. (i) A is a strong electrolyte while B is a weak electrolyte.
(ii) For electrolyte A, the plot becomes linear near high dilution and thus can be
extrapolated to zero concentration to get the molar conductivity at infinite dilution.
For weak electrolyte B, Λm increases steeply on dilution and extrapolation to zero
concentration is not possible. Hence, molar conductivity at infinite dilution cannot be
determined.
Q2. Calculate Δ�_�:∘ and log 𝐾�P for the following reaction at 298 K :
2Cr (�`) + 3Fe2+(�N�^) ⟶ 2Cr3+(�N�^) + 3Fe(�`)
Given: �8cell
0 = 0.30 V
�[
Ans. n=6, log 𝐾�P = �8cell
0.059
0 = 3.224 x 10 30, ΔG° = -nFE°cell = -1737.7KJ/mol, or log Kc =

30.5084
Q3. Three iron sheets have been coated separately with three metals 𝐴, �5 and �6 whose
standard electrode potentials are given below. Identify in which rusting will takes place
faster when coating is damaged.
Metal 𝐴 �5 �6 Iron
�80 −0.46 V −0.66 V −0.20 V −0.44 V
Ans. As iron (−0.44 V) has lower standard reduction potential than C(−0.20 V) only and
therefore when coating is broken, rusting will take place faster.
Q4. Can you store copper sulphate solutions in a zinc pot?
Ans. For this we have to check whether the following reaction will take place or not.
Zn(�`) + CuSO4(�N�^) ⟶ ZnSO4(�N�^) + Cu(�`)
�8�\ = �8o 2+ − �8o 2+ = 0.34 − (−0.76) = 1.10 V
cell Cu /Cu Zn /Zn
As �8cell
∘ is positive, the reaction will take place so No.
Q5. Suggest a way to determine the 𝚲0�Z value of water.
Ans.
𝚲�\�Z( H O) = �(H+) + �(OH −)
�\ �\
2
= ��\ + + ��\ − + ��\ − − �0 − + �0 + − �0 +
(H ) (OH ) (Cl ) (Cl ) (Na ) (Na )
Rearranging we get
𝚲o�Z( H ) = [�o + + �o −) ] + [� o + + �o −) ] − [� o + + �o ]
−)
2O (H ) (Cl (Na ) (OH (Na ) (Cl
𝚲o�Z( H ) = 𝚲o + 𝚲o − 𝚲o
2O �Z(HCl) �Z(NaOH) �Z(NaCl)

27 | P a g e
Thus, the molar conductivity of water at infinite dilution can be determined from the
knowledge of 𝚲o , 𝚲o and 𝚲o .
�Z(HCl) �Z(NaOH) �Z(NaCl)
Q6. Why on dilution the ⋀m of CH3COOH increases drastically while that of CH 3COONa
increases gradually?
Ans. Ans. CH3COOH is a weak electrolyte, the number of ions increase on dilution due
to an increase in degree of dissociation.
Q7. (a) What is the role of ZnCl2 in a dry cell
(b) Unlike dry cell, the mercury cell has a constant cell potential throughout its
useful life. why?
Ans (a) ZnCl2 combines with the NH3 produced to form the complex salt [Zn(NH3)2 Cl2]
otherwise the pressure developed due to NH3 would crack the seal of the cell
(b) Ions are not involved in the overall cell reaction of mercury cells
Q8. (a) Value of standard electrode potential for the oxidation of Cl– ions is more positive
than that of water, even then in the electrolysis of aqueous sodium chloride, why is Cl–
oxidised at anode instead of water?
(b) How will the pH of brine (aq. NaCl solution) be affected when it is electrolysed?
Ans. (a) On electrolysis of aqueous sodium chloride, oxidation of water at anode requires
over potential hence Cl– is oxidised instead of water.
(b) The pH of the solution will increase as NaOH is formed in the electrolytic cell.
Q9. (a) Which type of a metal can be used in cathodic protection of iron against rusting?
(b) Write the name of the electrolyte used in fuel cell
Ans. (a) More electropositive than iron such as Al, Zn, Mg etc. (b) Conc. Aq. KOH
solution
Q10. Depict the galvanic cell in which the reaction Zn(s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Zn2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s)
takes place. Further show: (i) Which of the electrode is negatively charged?
(ii) The carriers of the current in the cell.
Ans. Cell can be represented as Zn | Zn2+ (aq) ||Ag+ (aq) |Ag.
(i) zinc electrode is negatively charged (anode)
(ii) Ions are the current carriers within the cell

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)

Q1. (a) Calculate the cell emf and Δ�:∘ for the cell reaction at 25∘C for the cell :
Zn(�`)|Zn2+(0.0004M) ∥ Cd2+(0.2M)|Cd(�`) �8∘ values at 25∘C: Zn2+/Zn = −0.763 V
Cd2+/Cd = −0.403 V; �9 = 96500Cmol−1; 𝑅 = 8.314 J K−1 mol−1.
(b) If �8∘ for copper electrode is 0.34 V, how will you calculate its emf value when the
solution in contact with it is 0.1M in copperions? How does emf for copper electrode
change when concentration of Cu2+ ions in the solution is decreased?
�8∘ = �8∘ − �8∘ = 3.36V
cell cathode anode
Ans. (a)
The net cell reaction is, Zn(�`) + Cd2+ → Zn2+ + Cd(�`), n=2
(aq ) (aq )

�8 cell = ∘
�8cell −
0.0591
log
[𝑍�[2+] = 0.44 𝑉,
2 [�6�Q2+]
ΔG = −nFEcell = −84920J/mol
(b) Cu2+
(aq ) + 2�R → Cu (�`)
−

o 0.059 [Cu] 0.059 1 0.059

�8Cu2+/Cu = �8Cu2+/Cu − log = 0.34 − log = 0.34 − log 10
2 [Cu2+] 2 0.1 2

28 | P a g e
 0.059
= 0.34 − × (1) = 0.34 − 0.0295 = 0.3105 V
2
When the concentration of Cu2+ ions is decreased, the electrode potential for copper
decreases.
Q2. The molar conductivity of sodium acetate, sodium chloride and hydrochloric acid
are 83,127 and 426 mho cm2mol−1 at 250∘C respectively. Calculate the molar conductivity
of acetic acid solution.
Ans. Given : 𝚲∘m(CH3 COONa) = 83 mho cm2mol−1
𝚲m∘ (NaCl) = 127 mho cm2mol−1

𝚲m∘ (HCl) = 426 mho cm2mol−1

𝚲m∘ (CH3COOH) = ?

Using Kohlrausch law of independent migration of ions

𝚲∘ (CH COOH) = 𝚲∘ (CH COONa) + 𝚲∘ (HCl) − 𝚲∘ (NaCl) or 𝚲∘ (CH COOH) = 83 + 426 − 127
m 3 m 3 m m m 3
= 382 mho cm2mol−1
Q3. A strip of nickel metal is placed in a 1 molar solution of Ni(NO3)2 and a strip of silver
metal is placed in a 1 molar solution of AgNO3. An electrochemical cell is created when
the two solutions are connected by a salt bridge and the two strips are connected by
wires to a voltmeter.
(i) Write the balanced equation for the overall reaction occurring in the cell and calculate
the cell potential.
(ii) Calculate the cell potential, �8, at 25∘C for the cell if the initial concentration of
Ni(NO3)2 is 0.100 molar and the initial concentration of AgNO3 is 1.00 molar.
−1 = −1]
/Ni = −0.25 V; �8Ag + /Ag = 0.80 V, log 10
[�8Ni
0 2+ 0

Ans. Cell reaction: Ni + 2Ag+ → Ni2+ + 2Ag, E°Cell = E°cathode - E°anode, E°Cell = 1.05V
(ii)�8 = �8o
−
0.059
log
[Ni2+] = 1.0795V
cell cell �[ [Ag ] + 2

Q4. The electrochemical cell given alongside converts the chemical energy released
during the redox reaction to electrical energy: Zn(�`) + Cu2+(�N�^) ⟶ Zn2+(�N�^) + Cu(�`)
It gives an electrical potential of 1.1 V when concentration Zn2+ and Cu2+ ions is unity.
State the direction of flow of current and also specify whether zinc and copper are
deposited or dissolved at their respective electrodes when:
(i) an external opposite potential of less than 1.1 V is applied.
(ii) an external potential of 1.1 V is applied.
(iii) an external potential of greater than 1.1 V is applied.
Ans. (i) Reaction continues to take place. Electrons flow from Zn electrode to copper
electrode, current flows from Cu to Zn. Zn dissolves and copper deposits at their
respective electrodes.
(ii) The reaction stops and no current flows. (iii) Reaction takes place in opposite
directions.
Electrons flow from copper electrode to zinc electrode, current flows from Zn to Cu. cell
functions as an electrolytic cell.
Q5. Explain redox potential. Reduction potentials of some ions are given below. Arrange
them in decreasing order of oxidizing power.
Ion ClO− IO− BrO−
4 4 4

Reduction potential E⊖/V E0 = 1.19 V E0 = 1.65 V E0 = 1.74 V

29 | P a g e
Ans. It is a measure of the tendency of a chemical species to acquire electrons from or lose
electrons to an electrode and thereby be reduced or oxidized respectively. The more
positive the reduction potential of a species, the greater the species' affinity for electrons
and tendency to be reduced the higher the reduction potential, the higher is its tendency
to get reduced. Hence, the order of oxidizing power is:
BrO− > IO− > ClO−
4 4 4

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)

Q1. (i) State two advantages of H2—O2 fuel cell over ordinary cell.
(ii) Silver is electrodeposited on a metallic vessel of total surface area 500 cm2 by
passing a current of 0.5 amp for two hours. Calculate the thickness of silver deposited.
[Given: Density of silver = 10.5 g cm–3, Atomic mass of silver = 108 amu, F = 96,500 C
mol–1]
Ans. (i) pollution free, 75% efficiency, continuous source of energy.
(ii) m=ZIt = 4.029g, V=m/d = 0.3837 cm3, thickness of Ag deposited is x, V= A. x =
7.67x10-4cm
Q2. (i) Define limiting molar conductivity and fuel cell.
(ii) Resistance of a conductivity cell filled with 0.1 mol L–1 KCl solution is 100 ohm. If the
resistance of the same cell when filled with 0.02 mol L–1 KCl solution is 520 ohm,
calculate the conductivity and molar conductivity of 0.02 mol L–1 KCl solution. The
conductivity of 0.1 molL–1 KCl solution is 1.29 × 10–2 ohm–1 cm–1.
Ans (i) Limiting Molar conductivity -limiting value of molar conductivity when
concentration approaches to zero. Fuel cell - device which converts energy produced
during the combustion of fuels directly into electrical energy.
(ii) cell constant = conductivity x resistance = 1.29 cm–1, Conductivity, k = Cell
constant/Resistance = 0.00248 ohm–1 cm–1, Λm = k X 1000/M = 124 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1
CASE BASED QUESTIONS
Read the passage carefully and answer the questions.
Redox reactions play an important role in chemistry. Whenever a redox reaction takes
place directly in a single beaker, chemical energy in the form of heat is produced. By
suitable means, it is possible to bring about the redox reactions indirectly so as to convert
the chemical energy into electrical energy. A device used to convert the chemical energy
produced in a redox reaction into electrical energy is called an electrochemical cell. If a
redox reaction is allowed to take place in such a way that oxidation half reaction takes
place in one beaker and the reduction half reaction in another beaker, the electrons given
out by the former will be taken by the latter and the current will ow. The two portions of
the cell are called half cells. The values of standard redox potential ( �80 ) of two half cell
reactions decides in which way the reaction will proceed. A redox reaction is feasible when
the substance having higher reduction potential gets reduced and the one having lower
reduction potential gets oxidised. For example, In Daniel cell, zinc goes into solution and
copper gets deposited.
1. Formulate the galvanic cell for: Zn(�`) + 2Ag+(�N�^) ⟶ Zn2+(�N�^) + 2Ag(�`)
Ans. The cell is represented as: Zn(�`)|Zn2+(�N�^) ∥ Ag+(�N�^)|Ag(�`)
2. Is it safe to stir AgNO3 solution with a copper spoon? Why or why not?
Given: �80Ag + /Ag = 0.80 volt and �8Cu +/Cu = 0.34 volt
0 2

30 | P a g e
Ans. No, because copper is more reactive than Ag and can displace Ag from AgNO3
solution.
3. Two half-cell reactions of an electrochemical cell are given below:
MnO4−(�N�^) + 8H+(�N�^) + 5�R− ⟶ Mn2+(�N�^) + 4H2O(�Y), �80 = +1.51 V
Sn2+(�N�^) ⟶ Sn4+(�N�^) + 2�R−, �80 = +0.15 V
Construct the redox reaction from the two half-cell reactions and predict if this reaction
favours formation of reactants or products shown in the equation.
Ans.
2MnO4−(�N�^) + 16H+(�N�^) + 5Sn2+(�N�^) ⟶ 2Mn2+(�N�^) + 5Sn4+(�N�^) + 8H2O(�Y)
�8�\ = �8∘ − �8∘ = 1.51 V − 0.15 V = 0.36 V, product forms
Cell Cathode Anode

OR

(i) State the factors affecting cell potential of: Mg (�`)|Mg2+(�N�^) ∥ Ag+(�N�^)|Ag(�`)
(ii) Can �8cell
0 or Δ�_�:0 for cell reaction ever be equal to zero?
Ans.(i) concentration of Mg2+ and Ag+ions in the solution and temperature.
(iii) No, �8cell
∘ or Δ�_�:0 for cell reaction can never be zero. ΔG°= -nFE°

31 | P a g e
32 | P a g e
 3. CHEMICAL KINETICS
QUICK REVISION POINTS
Rate of a Chemical Reaction: It is the change in concentration of a reactant or product
in unit time (or) it is the rate of change of concentration of reacting species.
Consider a reaction,
R→P
−[𝑅]  [�C]
Rate of a Chemical Reaction = =
− �a  �a

Factors Influencing Rate of a reaction:

(i)effect of concentration of reactants (pressure in case of gases),
(ii) effect of temperature and (iii) effect of catalyst.
Average Rate Instantaneous Rate
It is the change in concentration of It is the change in concentration of
reactants in a given interval of time reactants at instantaneous time

Rate Law Expression: It is a mathematical expression in which rate of reaction is

expressed in terms of molar concentration of reactants with each term raised to power,
which may or may not be equal to the stoichiometric coefficient of the reacting species in
a balanced chemical equation.
Consider a general reaction: a A + b B→ c C + d D, then
Rate Law = k [A] [B] , where,
x y

‘x’ may/ may not be equal to ‘a’ and ‘y’ may/ may not be equal to ‘b’

Order of a Reaction: It is the sum of powers of concentrations of reactants expressed in

rate law.
Consider a general reaction: a A + b B→ c C + d D, then
Rate Law = k [A]x [B]y, overall order of reaction = (x+y) and x and y represent the order
with respect to the reactants A and B respectively.
Order of a reaction can be 0, 1, 2, 3 and even a fraction. A zero-order reaction means
that the rate of reaction is independent of the concentration of reactants.

Units of rate constant (k)

REACTION ORDER UNITS OF RATE CONSTANT
Zero order reaction 0 mol L-1S-1

first order reaction 1 S-1

Second order reaction 2 mol-1 LS-1

nth order of reaction nth mol(1-n)L(n-1)S-1

33 | P a g e
Difference between order of reaction and molecularity of reaction:
Order of reaction Molecularity of reaction
1 It is the sum of powers of The number of reacting species (atoms, ions
concentrations of reactants or molecules) taking part in an elementary
expressed in rate law. reaction, which must collide simultaneously
in order to bring about a chemical reaction
2 Order of a reaction is an Molecularity of a reaction is a theoretical
experimental quantity. quantity.
3 It can be zero and even a Molecularity cannot be zero or a non-integer.
fraction
4 Order is applicable to Molecularity is applicable only for elementary
elementary as well as reactions.
complex reactions

Integrated Rate Equations

(i) Zero Order Reactions: Consider zero order reaction
R → products
Let [R]o be the initial concentration of reactant and [R] be the final concentration at time‘t’.
For zero order reaction, the rate of the reaction is proportional to zero power of the
concentration of reactants.
�Q[𝑅] �Q[𝑅]
Rate = − = k [R ]o Rate = − =k  d[R] = – k dt
�Q�a �Q�a
Integrating on both sides
[R] = – k t + I, where, I is the constant of integration.
when t = 0, the concentration of the reactant R becomes [R]0, where [R]0 is initial
concentration of the reactant.
[𝑅]�\−[𝑅]
[R]0 = –k × 0 + I [R]0 = I  [R] = –kt + [R]0  k=
�a
Comparing with equation of a straight line, y = mx + c, a graph is drawn between [R]
against t, it gives a straight line with slope = –k and intercept equal to [R]0.

Some enzyme catalysed reactions and reactions which occur on metal surfaces (metal
catalyst) are a few examples of zero order reactions.
(ii) First Order Reactions
Consider first order reaction
R →P
Let [R]o be the initial concentration of reactant and [R] be the final concentration at time‘t’.
For zero order reaction, the rate of the reaction is proportional to the first power of the
concentration of the reactant R.
�Q[𝑅] �Q[𝑅]
Rate =− =kR  = −kdt
�Q�a 𝑅

34 | P a g e
Integrating on both sides, ln [R] = – kt + I, I is the constant of integration.
When t = 0, R becomes [R]0, where [R]0 is the initial concentration of the reactant.
Therefore, ln [R]0 = –k × 0 + Iln [R]0 = I
Substituting the value of I, ln[R] = –kt + ln[R]0
[𝑅] 1 [𝑅]�\
Rearranging this equation, ln = kt Or, k = ln  k=
2.303
log
[𝑅]�\
[𝑅]�\ �a 𝑅 �a 𝑅
A graph is drawn between log [R] against ‘t’ gives a straight line with slope = –k and
intercept equal to log [R]0

Half-Life of a Reaction: It is the time required to reduce the concentration of reactant to

half of its initial concentration.
Case 1: For a zero order reaction, rate constant is given by equation
[R0 − R]
K=
�a
when t = t½, then [R] = ½ [R0]
1
[R0 − R0]
The rate constant at t½ becomes k =
2
t½ =[𝑅�\]
�a 1 2𝑘
2
t½for a zero-order reaction is directly proportional to the initial concentration of the
reactants and inversely proportional to the rate constant.
Case 2:For the first order reaction,
2.303 [𝑅�\]
k= log
�a [𝑅]
2.303 [𝑅�\]
At t = t½, then [R] = ½ [R0]k = log
�a [𝑅�\]/2
2.303 0.693
t½ = log 2  t½ =
�a 𝑘

Pseudo First Order Reaction: A reaction which appear to follow higher order but follows
lower order kinetics.
Effect of temperature on rate of a reaction
Rate of a reaction always increases with increase of temperature
(i) According to Kinetic theory of Molecular gases, the average
kinetic energy of reacting gaseous molecules is directly
proportional to absolute temperature.
K.E  T  ½ mv2 T
As temperature increases, speed of reacting molecules
increases. Thereby, the frequency of collisions also increases
and hence rate of reaction increases.

35 | P a g e
(ii) Experimental evidence shows that for every 10 degree rise in temperature, the rate of
a reaction will be doubled.
(iii) If ‘E’ is the energy barrier, then the number of molecules that crosses over the energy
barrier is more at higher temperature than at low temperature.
Activated complex (Transition State theory):It is the reaction intermediate possessing
energy that correspond to top of energy barrier.

Activated complex state is highly energy state and hence it is highly unstable state. It is
always reversible state.
Consider a reaction: H2 (g) + I2( g ) → 2HI ( g )

If the total energy of reacting species are equal or higher than threshold energy then the
reaction proceed in forward direction and hence gives the products otherwise it retain as
reactants only.
Effect of Catalyst: A catalyst is a substance which alters the rate of a reaction without
itself undergoing any permanent chemical change.

Catalyst help to increase the rate of chemical reaction. It carries the reaction through the
path of lower activation energy.

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS:

1. For a given rate, the unit of rate and the rate constant are the same.
(A) zero order reaction (B) first order reaction
(C) second order reaction (D) third order reaction
2. If concentration of reactant ‘A’ is increased 10 times and the rate of reaction
becomes 100 times. What is the order with respect to ‘A’?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

36 | P a g e
3. Which of the following is not a direct factor affecting the rate of a reaction?
(A) Temperature (B) Presence of catalyst
(C) Order of reaction (D) Molecularity
4. In the reaction 2A + B → A2B, if the concentration of A is doubled and that of B is
halved, then the rate of the reaction will
(A) increase 2 times (B) increase 4 times
(C) decrease 2 times (D) remain the same
5. A first order reaction has a half-life length of 10 minutes. In 100 minutes, what
proportion of the response will be completed?
(A) 25% (B) 50% (C) 99.9% (D) 75%
6. What is the order of reaction decomposition of Ammonia on platinum surface is
(A) Zero order reaction (B) First order reaction
(C) Second order reaction (D) Fractional order reaction
7. In the rate equation, when the concentration of reactants is unity then the rate is
equal to:
(A) Specific rate constant (B) Average rate constant
(C) Instantaneous rate constant (D) None of the above
8. The rate constant of zero order reactions has the unit
(A) s-1 (B) mol L-1s-1
(C) L2 mol-2 s-1 (D) L mol-1s-1
9. Radioactive disintegration is an example of
(A) first order reaction (B) zero order reaction
(C) second order reaction (D) third order reaction
10. A catalyst alters, which of the following in a chemical reaction?
(A) Entropy (B) Enthalpy
(C) Internal energy (D) Activation energy
ASSERTION – REASON BASED QUESTIONS
Read the Assertion and Reason statements and choose the appropriate option
from below:
A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
B) Both A and R are true and R is not the correct explanation of A
C) A is true but R is false
D) A is false but R is true
1. Assertion: Increasing the pressure of reactants can increase the rate of a reaction.
Reason: Higher pressure can increase the frequency of collisions between reactant
molecules
2. Assertion: The presence of a catalyst increases the activation energy of a reaction.
Reason: Catalysts provide an alternative reaction pathway with a lower activation
energy.
3. Assertion: Hydrolysis of methyl ethanoate is a pseudo-first-order reaction.
Reason: Water is present in large excess and therefore its concentration remained
constant throughout the reaction.
4. Assertion: Average rate and instantaneous rate of a reaction have the same unit.
Reason: Average rate becomes an instantaneous rate when the time interval is too
small.
5. Assertion: All collision of reactant molecules lead to product formation.
Reason: Only those collisions in which molecules have correct orientation and
sufficient kinetics energy lead to compound formation.

37 | P a g e
 VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1 MARK)
1. In some cases, it is found that a large number of colliding molecules have energy more
than threshold value, yet the reaction is slow. Why?
2. For a reaction R→P, half-life (t½ ) is observed to be independent of the initial
concentration of reactants. What is the order of reaction?
3. Why does the rate of a reaction not remain constant throughout the reaction
process?
4. What is elementary reaction?
5. Express the rate of the following in terms of ammonia.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
6. Mention the factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
7. In a reaction, 2A → Products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L–1 to
0.4 mol L–1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this interval?
8. A graph is drawn between ln[R] and t
for a reaction. What is order of reaction?

9. Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the
decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
10. How catalyst increase the rate of reaction?
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS TYPE-1 (2 MARKS)
1. What is the effect of temperature on the rate constant of a reaction?
2. Define each of the following:
(i) Specific rate of a reaction. (ii) Energy of activation of a reaction.
3. Bring out the difference between order and molecularity of reaction.

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS TYPE-2 (3 MARKS)

1. For the reaction A + B →products, the following initial rates were obtained at various
given initial concentrations. Determine the overall order of a reaction

2. Observe the graph in diagram and answer the following questions.

38 | P a g e
 (i) If slope is equal to -2.0 x10-6 sec-1, what will be the value of
rate constant?
(ii) How does the half-life of zero order reaction relate to its
rate constant?

3. (a) Consider a certain reaction A → Products with k = 2.0 × 10 -2 s-1. Calculate the
concentration of a remaining after 100 s if the initial concentration of A is
1.0 mol l-1
(b) The half-life for radioactive decay of C -14 is 5730 years. An archaeological
artefact containing wood had only 80% of the C -14 found in a living tree. Estimate
the age of the sample.
4. If a zero-order reaction starts with the concentration of 10 mol/L, it’s half-life is
2 minutes, what will be the half-life of the same reaction, if it is started with
20 mol/L?

5. (i) What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant?

(ii) State a condition under which a biomolecular reaction is kinetically first order
reaction.
(iii) For a zero-order reaction, will the molecularity be equal to zero? Explain.
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)
1. (a) (i) For the reaction 2X →X2, the rate of reaction becomes three times, when
concentration of X is increased 27 times. What is the order of the reaction?
(ii) Write the rate equation for the reaction
2A + B →2C, if the order of the reaction is zero.
(iii) Oxygen is available in plenty in air, yet fuels do not burn by themselves at room
Temperature. Explain.
(b) Rate constant for first order reaction has been found to be 2·54 ×10–3 s–1.
Calculate its three- fourth life. [log 2 = 0·3010].
2. (a) (i) A reaction is 50% complete in 2 hours and 75% complete in 4 hours. What is
the order of the reaction?
(ii) A first order reaction is 50% completed in 1.26 × 1014 s. How much time would
it take for 100% completion?
(iii) The activation energy of a reaction is zero. Will the rate constant depend upon
temperature? Explain.
(b) A reaction is first order in A and second order in B. Write the differential rate
equation and calculate how the rate is affected when
(i) concentration of B is tripled, (ii) concentration of both A and B is doubled.

CASE BASED QUESTIONS / INTEGRATED BASED QUESTIONS (4 MARKS)

1. Read the passage carefully and answer the questions that follow
Rate of the Reaction
Speed of any event is measured by the change that occurs in any interval of time.
The speed of a reaction (reaction rate) is expressed as the change in concentration
of a reactant or product over a certain amount of time. Sometimes it is more
convenient to express rates as numbers of molecules formed or consumed in unit
time.

39 | P a g e
 We could also look at the rate of appearance of a product. As a product appears, its
concentration increases. The rate of appearance is a positive quantity. We can also
say the rate of appearance of a product is equal to the rate of disappearance of a
reactant.
Answer the following questions:
(a) Write the rate of the chemical reaction with respect to the variables for the given
equation.
2A+3B→C+2D
(b) In a reaction, 2A → Products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L–1
to 0.4 mol L–1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this interval?
(c) In the reaction H2O2(aq) → H2O(l) + ½ O2(g), the initial concentration of H2O2 is
0.2546 M, and the initial rate of reaction is 9.32×10–4 M s–1. What will be [H2O2]
at t = 35 s?
OR
(c) How is the rate of disappearance of ozone related to the rate of appearance of
oxygen in the following equation?
2O3 (g) → 3O2 (g)
If the rate of appearance of O2 is 60.0 ×10-5 M/s at a particular instant, what is the
value of the rate of disappearance of O3 at this same time?
2. Read the passage carefully and answer the questions that follow
Order of the Reaction
The rate law for a chemical reaction relates the reaction rate with the concentrations
or partial pressures of the reactants. For a general reaction, aA + bB→ C with no
intermediate steps in its reaction mechanism, meaning that it is an elementary
reaction. The rate law is given by r = k [A]x [B]y where [A] and [B] express the
concentrations of A and B in moles per litre. Exponents x and y vary for each
reaction and are determined experimentally. The value of k varies with conditions
that affect reaction rate, such as temperature, pressure, surface area, etc. The sum
of these exponents is known as overall reaction order. A zero order reaction has
constant rate that is independent of the concentration of the reactants. A first order
reaction depends on the concentration of only reactant. A reaction is said to be of
second order when the overall order is two. Once we have determined the order of
the reaction, we can go back and plug one set of our initial values and solve for k.
Answer the following questions:
(a) Calculate the overall order of the reaction which has the following rate
expression:
Rate= k[A]1/2[B]3/2
(b) What is the effect of temperature on rate of the reaction?
(c) What is meant by the rate of reaction?
(d) A first order reaction takes 77.78 minutes for 50% completion. Calculate the time
required for 30% completion of the reaction. (log 10= 1, log 7=0.8450)
OR
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1x10-3 s-1. How long will 5 gm of this
reactant take to reduce to 3 gm? (log 3= 0.4771, log 5=0.6990)

40 | P a g e
3. Read the passage carefully and answer the questions that follow
Radio Activity
There are nuclear reactions constantly occurring in our bodies, but these are very
few of them compared to the chemical reactions, and they do not affect our bodies
much. All of the physical processes that take place to keep a human body running
are chemical processes. Nuclear reactions can lead to chemical damage, which the
body may notice and try to fix. The nuclear reaction occurring in our bodies is
radioactive decay. This is the change of a less stable nucleus to a more stable
nucleus. Every atom has either a stable nucleus or an unstable nucleus, depending
on how big it is and on the ratio of protons to neutrons. The ratio of neutrons to
protons in a stable nucleus is thus around 1:1 for small nuclei (Z<20). Nuclei with
too many neutrons, too few neutrons, or that are simply too big are unstable. They
eventually transform to a stable form through radioactive decay. Wherever there are
atoms with unstable nuclei (radioactive atoms), there are nuclear reactions
occurring naturally. The interesting thing is that there are small amounts of
radioactive atoms everywhere: in your chair, in the ground, in the food you eat, and
yes, in your body. The most common natural radioactive isotopes in humans are
carbon-14 and potassium-40. Chemically, these isotopes behave exactly like stable
carbon and potassium. For this reason, the body uses carbon-14 and potassium-
40 just like it does normal carbon and potassium; building them into the different
parts of the cells, without knowing that they are radioactive. In time, carbon-14
atoms decay to stable nitrogen atoms and potassium-40 atoms decay to stable
calcium atoms. Half-life of C-14 is 6000 years Chemicals in the body that relied on
having a carbon14 atom or potassium-40 atom in a certain spot will suddenly have
a nitrogen or calcium atom. Such a change damages the chemical. Normally, such
changes are so rare, that the body can repair the damage or filter away the damaged
chemicals.
Answer the following questions:
(a) Why is Carbon -14 radioactive while Carbon -12 not?
(Atomic number of Carbon: 6)
(b) Which are the two most common radioactive decays happening in human body?
(c) Suppose an organism has 20 g of Carbon -14 at its time of death. Approximately
how much Carbon -14 remains after 10,320 years? (Given antilog 0.517 = 3.289)
OR
(c) Approximately how old is a fossil with 12 g of Carbon -14 if it initially possessed
32 g of Carbon -14? (Given log 2.667 = 0.4260)
4. Read the passage carefully and answer the questions that follow
Temperature Dependence of Rate of a Reaction
Temperature influences the rate of a reaction. As the temperature increases, the rate
of a reaction increases. For example, the time taken to melt a metal will be much
higher at a lower temperature but it will decrease as soon as we increase the
temperature. It has been found that the rate constant is nearly doubled for a chemical
reaction with a rise in temperature by 10°. The dependence of the rate of a chemical
reaction on temperature can be explained by Arrhenius equation.
k = A e -Ea/RT
According to the Arrhenius equation, a reaction can only take place when a molecule
of one substance collides with the molecule of another to form an unstable
intermediate. This intermediate exists for a very short time and then breaks up to form
product. The energy required to form this intermediate is known as activation energy
(Ea). The fraction of molecules with kinetic energy equal to or greater than Ea at a

41 | P a g e
 given temperature may lead to the product. As the temperature rises, the
proportion of molecules with energies equal to or greater than activation energy
(≥Ea) increases. As a result, the reaction rate would increase.
Answer the following questions:
(a) How does the half life period of a first order reaction vary with temperature?
OR
For an endothermic reaction, the activation energy of forward reaction will be equal
to or less than or more than activation energy of backward reaction.
(b) The slope of Arrhenius Plot (ln k vs 1/T) of first order reaction is −5×103K.
Calculate the value of Ea of the reaction. [Given R = 8.314JK−1mol−1]
(c) The rate constant of a reaction is 6×10-3 s-1 at 50° and 9×10-3 s-1 at 100° C.
Calculate the energy of activation of the reaction.
5. Read the passage carefully and answer the questions that follow:
The Arrhenius equation, developed by Swedish chemist Svante Arrhenius, is a
fundamental equation in chemical kinetics that relates the rate constant (k) of a
reaction to temperature (T) and the activation energy (Ea). The equation is given
by:
k = A e−Ea/RT
Here, A is the pre-exponential factor or frequency factor, Ea is the activation
energy, R is the ideal gasconstant, and T is the absolute temperature.
The Arrhenius equation helps explain the temperature dependence of reaction
rates. As temperature increases, the exponential term e−Ea/RT becomes smaller,
leading to a higher rate constant and consequently, a faster reaction. Conversely,
lower temperatures result in a decrease in the rate constant and a slower reaction.
In summary, the Arrhenius equation provides valuable insights into the
relationship between temperature and reaction rates, aiding in the understanding
and prediction of chemical reactions under different temperature conditions.

a) Calculate the activation energy for a reaction if the rate constant is

known at two differenttemperatures.
b) Define activation energy?
c) Calculate the activation energy of a reaction if the slope of its ln k vs 1/T plot is
-3166 K.
OR
c) The activation energy for the reaction 2 HI(g) → H2 + I2 (g) is 209.5 kJ mol–1
at 581K. Calculate the fraction of molecules of reactants having energy equal to
or greater than activation energy?

42 | P a g e
 ANSWERS
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A B D A C A A B A D

ASSERTION – REASON BASED QUESTIONS

1 2 3 4 5
A D A B D

VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1 MARK)

1. because of the orientation of the molecules which are colliding.
2. first order reaction
3. A reaction depends upon change in the amount of chemical substances varies
with time and hence the reaction rate does not remain constant throughout.
4. A reaction which occur in single step
5.
6. concentration of reactants (pressure in case of gases), temperature and catalyst.
7.
8. First order reaction
9.

10. Catalyst takes the reaction through the path of lower activation energy.
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS TYPE-1 (2 MARKS)
1. Rate of a reaction always increases with increase of temperature
(i) According to Kinetic theory of Molecular gases, the average kinetic energy of
reacting gaseous molecules is directly proportional to absolute temperature.
K.E  T  ½ mv2 T
As temperature increases, speed of reacting molecules increases. Thereby, the
frequency of collisions also increases and hence rate of
reaction increases.
(ii) Experimental evidence shows that for every 10-
degree rise in temperature, the rate of a reaction will
be doubled.
(iii) If ‘E’ is the energy barrier, then the number of
molecules that crosses over the energy barrier is more
at higher temperature than at low temperature.
2. (i) A given temperature, rate is equal to the rate
constant of reaction when concentration of the
reactant in unity. Thus rate constant is also known as
specific reaction rate.
(ii) Additional energy required by the reacting molecules to attain Threshold energy
is called Activation energy.

43 | P a g e
3.
Order of reaction Molecularity of reaction
1 It is the sum of powers of The number of reacting species (atoms, ions
concentrations of reactants or molecules) taking part in an elementary
expressed in rate law. reaction, which must collide simultaneously
in order to bring about a chemical reaction
2 Order of a reaction is an Molecularity of a reaction is a theoretical
experimental quantity. quantity.
3 It can be zero and even a Molecularity cannot be zero or a non-integer.
fraction
4 Order is applicable to Molecularity is applicable only for elementary
elementary as well as reactions.
complex reactions
4. let us take the value of k1 = k and that of k2 = 2k

5.

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS TYPE-2 (3 MARKS)

1. For A, Rate =k[A]x For B, Rate =k[B]y
From case 1 and 2  2× Rate =k[2A]x From case 1 and 3, Rate =k[2B] y
x=1 y=0
Order n = x+y =1+0 =1
2. (i) SLOPE = -K - 2.0x10-6 sec-1 = -K Hence k = 2.0x10-6 sec-1
(ii) t ½= R0/2k
3. (a) The integrated rate expression for the first order reaction is as follows:
k=2.303/t log[A]0/ [A] ⟹2.0×10−2=2.303tlog1.0[A]
⟹log1.0[A]=0.868 ⟹[A]=0.135M
(b) Decay constant k=0.693t1/2=0.6935730year=1.209×10−4/years
The rate of counts is proportional to the number of C-14 atoms in the sample.
N0=100, N=80 The age of the sample t=2.303/k log(N0/N)
t=2.303/1.209×10 × log(10080)=1846years
−4

4. For zero order reaction-t1/2=[R0]/2k (half-life is directly proportional to initial

concentration)
So t1/2 for 20 mol/L will be 4 minutes.
5. a) The rate constant of a reaction is nearly doubled with rise in temperature by 10
b) Bimolecular reactions become kinetically first order when one of the reactants is
present in excess
c) No, the molecularity can never be zero or a fractional number. As it represents
the total number of reactants taken in a reaction

44 | P a g e
 LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)
1. (a) (i)Rate =k(x)n ; 3Rate =k(27x)n
Solving then, n =1/3, so order of reaction =1/3
(ii)Rate =k[A]0[B]0=k
(iii)The activation energy for combustion of fuels is generally very high, and not
achieved at room temperature.
(b) t =2.303 log[R0]
k [R]
t3/4= 2.303log[R0]
¼[R0]
=5.46 x102 s
2. (a)(i) First order
(ii) Infinite, because no first order reaction is 100% completed.

(iii) k= Ae-Ea/RT, if Ea=0 then k =A, so the rate constant does not depend on
temperature.
(b) Rate(R)=k[A][B]2
(i)Rate(R1) =k[A][B]2
(R1) =9R, so the rate increases 9 times.
(ii) R2= k[A][B]2
R2=8R, rate increases 8 times
CASE BASED QUESTIONS / INTEGRATED BASED QUESTIONS (4 MARKS)
1 𝛥[𝐴] 1 𝛥[�5] 𝛥[�6] 1 𝛥[�7]
1. (a) Rate = - =- = =
2 𝛥�a 3 𝛥�a 𝛥�a 2 𝛥�a
1 [𝐴]− [𝐴�\]
(b) Rate = -
2 �a
1 [0.4]− [0.5]
Rate = -
2 10
Rate = 5 × 10-3 mol L- min-
(c) Rate = 9.32×10–4 Ms–1 = - 𝛥[�;2�B2]
𝛥�a
[H2O2]− 0.2546 M
9.32×10–4 Ms–1 = -
(35−0)s
H2O2 = 0.2220 M
OR
1 𝛥[�B3] 1 𝛥[�B2]
Rate = - =
2 𝛥�a 3 𝛥�a
𝛥[�B3] 2 𝛥[�B2] = 2 (60.0 ×10-5 M/s) = 4.0 ×10-5 M/s
=- =
𝛥�a 3 𝛥�a 3
2. (a) Rate = k[A]1/2[B]3/2, as it is an elementary reaction,
Order of reaction = 1/2 + 3/2 = 2
(b) Rate of reaction increases with increase in temperature.
(c) Rate of reaction is the rate of change in concentration of a reactant per unit time.
(d) For first order reaction
R = 0.693/t1/2 = (0. 693)/(77.78min) = 8.90x 10- 3 min
Time required to complete 30% reaction,
t = (2.303)/k x log a / (a - x) = (2.303) / (8.9x 10- 3 min- 1) x log (100 / (100 - 30))
= ((2.303 x103 x 0.155)/(8.9) = 40minutes

45 | P a g e
 OR
For a first order reaction
t = (2.303)/k x log a/(a - x) = 2.303/1x10- 3x log 5/3 = 2.303x 103 x 0.2219 s
= 511 s
3. (a) Ratio of neutrons to protons in C-14 is 1.3: 1 which is not the stable ratio of 1:1
while ratio of neutrons to protons in C-12 is 1:1 which is the stable ratio.
(b) carbon-14 atoms decay to stable nitrogen atoms and potassium-40 atoms decay
to stable calcium
(c) t = 2.303/ k log (Co/Ct)
Co = 20 g Ct = ? t = 10320 years
k = 0.693/6000 (half-life given in passage)
Substituting in equation:
10320 = 2.303 / (0.693/6000) log 20/ Ct 0.517 = log 20 / Ct
Antilog (0.517) = 20/Ct 3.289 = 20/Ct Ct = 6.17 g
OR
t = 2.303/ k log (Co/Ct) Co = 32 g Ct = 12 t=?
k = 0.693/6000 (half-life given in passage)
Substituting in equation:
t = 2.303 / (0.693/6000) log 32/ 12
t = 2.303 x 6000/0.693 log 2.667 = 2.303x6000x0.4260 /0.693 = 8494 years
4. (a) Half-life period increases with temperature.
OR
The activation energy of forward reaction will be more than activation energy of
backward reaction.
(b) k = Ae -Ea/RT ln k = ln A – Ea/RT Slope = -Ea/R = - 5 × 103
Ea = 5 ×103 ×8.314 = 41.57×103 J/mol
(c) k1 = 6 × 10-3 s-1 T1 = 50 + 273 = 323 K
k2 = 9 × 10-3 s-1 T2 = 100 + 273 = 373 K
Substituting these values in the equation:
log (k2 / k1 ) = (Ea / 2.303 R) × ((T2 – T1) / T1 T2)
log (9 × 10-3 s-1 / 6 × 10-3 s-1 ) = ((Ea / (2.303 × 8.314)) × ((373 – 323) / (373 × 323))
log (9 / 6) = ((Ea / (2.303 × 8.314)) × (50 / (373 × 323)) Ea = 8.124 kJ mol-1.
5. (a)

(c) Additional energy required by the reacting molecules to attain Threshold energy
is called Activation energy.
(d) 110.115 kJ/mol OR
The fraction of molecules of reactants having energy equal to or greater than
activation energy is 1.471×10−19

46 | P a g e
47 | P a g e
 4. THE d- AND f-BLOCK ELEMENTS
QUICK REVISION POINTS:
1. d-block elements
(a) DEFINITION: A transition element is defined as the one which has incompletely filled
d orbitals in its ground state or in any one of its oxidation states. Zinc, cadmium and
mercury of group 12 have full d10 configuration in their ground state as well as in
their common oxidation states and hence, are not regarded as transition metals. Their
Outer electronic configuration is (n -1) d1-10 ns 1-2
(b) MELTING AND BOILING POINTS: High MP & BP which is due to their strong metallic
bond (strong interatomic bonding ) due to unpaired electrons in (n-1) d orbitals.In any
row the melting points of these metals rise to a maximum at d 5 except for anomalous
values of Mn and Tc.
(c) ENTHALPIES OF ATOMIZATION: High enthalpies of atomization Because of large
number of unpaired electrons in their atoms they have stronger interatomic
interaction (metal-metal bonding). The metals of the second and third series have
greater enthalpies of atomisation than the corresponding elements of the first series
due to occurrence of much more frequent metal – metal bonding.
(d) VARIATION IN ATOMIC AND IONIC SIZES : In general, ions of the same charge in a
given series show progressive decrease in radius with increasing atomic number The
atomic radii decreases from group 3 to 6 because of increase in effective nuclear
charge gradually, The atomic radii of group 7,8,9 &10 elements is almost same
because Screening effect counter balances increased effective nuclear charge, Group
11 &12 elements have bigger size due to increase inter-electronic repulsion as result
electron cloud expands and size increases. Members of second(4d) and the third (5d)
series in each group of transition elements have similar radii and shows similar
properties because lanthanoid contraction essentially compensates for the expected
increase in atomic size with increasing atomic number.
(e) DENSITY: The decrease in metallic radius coupled with increase in atomic mass
results in a general increase in the density of these elements. Thus, from titanium
(22) to copper ( 29) the significant increase in the density may be noted.
(f) VARIATION IN IONISATION ENTHALPIES OF TRANSITION METALS: There is an
increase in ionisation enthalpy along each series of the transition elements from left
to right due to an increase in nuclear charge which accompanies the filling of the
inner d orbitals. Irregular variation of ionisation enthalpies is mainly attributed to
varying degree of stability of different 3d-configurations (e.g., d0, d5, d10 are
exceptionally stable).
(g) OXIDATION STATES: The transition elements show variable oxidation state due to
small energy difference between (n-1) d & ns orbital as a result both (n-1) d & ns
electrons take part in bond formation. The highest oxidation state of an element is
equal to number of unpaired e- present in (n-1) d & ns orbital.
(h) MAGNETIC PROPERTIES : Most of the transition metal ions are paramagnetic. due
to the presence of unpaired electrons in d-orbitals. Magnetic moment is given by

Where, n = number of unpaired electrons and BM = Bohr magneton (unit of magnetic

moment).

48 | P a g e
 (i) FORMATION OF COLOURED IONS: Due to the presence of unpaired electrons in d-
orbitals of the transition metal ions & because of d– d transitions occurring in a
transition metal ions by the absorption of visible light.
(j) FORMATION OF COMPLEX COMPOUNDS :- Due to smaller sizes of the metal ions,
their high ionic charges and the availability of d orbitals for bond formation.
(k) CATALYTIC PROPERTIES: Due to Variable oxidation states & Large surface area.
(l) FORMATION OF INTERSTITIAL COMPOUNDS: Transition elements form interstitial
compounds because size of C, N, O, and B is similar to size of interstitial voids of
transition metals.
(m) ALLOY FORMATION: As the atomic sizes are very similar, one metal can replace
the other metal from its lattice and form a solid solution which is the alloy.
(n) STANDARD ELECTRODE POTENTIALS: Transition elements have lower negative
value of Standard Electrode Potentials due to high ionization potential, high heat of
sublimation & low enthalpy of hydration. The E0 (M2+/M) values are not regular which
can be explained from the irregular variation of ionization enthalpies and also the
sublimation enthalpies which are relatively much less for manganese and vanadium.
(o) Oxide of transition metals in lower oxidation states are generally basic while those
in the higher oxidation states are acidic. Acidic character increases with increase in
oxidation state is due to decrease in size of metal ion and increase in effective nuclear
charge.e.g. MnO (basic), Mn3O4 (amphoteric), Mn2O7 (acidic).
2. LANTHANOIDS
(a) The 14 elements after Lanthanum having atomic number 58 to 71 are collectively
known as Lanthanoids. The general electronic configuration of these elements is [Xe]
4f1-14, 5d0-1,6s2.
(b) LANTHANOID CONTRACTION (ATOMIC AND IONIC SIZES): The overall decrease in
atomic and ionic radii from lanthanum to lutetium is due to poor shielding of 4f
electrons is known as lanthanoid contraction. Due to lanthanoid contraction:-
(a)basic character of oxides and hydroxides decreases from La(OH)3 to Lu(OH)3,
(b) Sizes of 4d and 5d metal pairs like Zr and Hf; Nb and Ta are almost similar.
(c) OXIDATION STATES: Most common oxidation state of these elements is +3,
However, occasionally +2 (Eu+2 and Yb+2)and +4 ions (Ce+4 and Tb+4) in solution or in
solid compounds are also obtained.
(d) COLOUR FORMATION :Many trivalent lanthanoid ions are coloured both in the solid
state and in aqueous solutions. Colour of these ions may be attributed to the
presence of unpaired electrons in f subshell.
(e) MAGNETIC BEHAVIOUR: The lanthanoid ions other than the f 0 type (La3+ and Ce4+)
and the f 14 type (Yb2+ and Lu3+) are all paramagnetic.
(f) USES : A well-known alloy is mischmetall which consists of a lanthanoid metal(~ 95%)
and iron (~ 5%) and traces of S, C, Ca and Al. A good deal of mischmetall is used in
Mg-based alloy to produce bullets, shell and lighter flint.
3. ACTINOIDS
(a) The 14 elements after Actinium having atomic number 90 to 113 are collectively
known as Actinoids
(b) The actinoids are radioactive elements These facts render their study more
difficult.
(c) Electronic Configurations: The general electronic configuration of these elements
is [Rn] 5f1-14, 6d0-1,7s2

49 | P a g e
 (d) Ionic Sizes(Actinoid contraction): The overall decrease in atomic and ionic radii
across the series due to poor shielding of 5f electrons is known as Actinoid
contraction
(e) The actinoid contraction is, however, greater from element to element in this series
resulting from poor shielding by 5f electrons.
(f) Oxidation States: The actinoids show in general +3 oxidation state. The actinoids
exhibit a larger number of oxidation states, which is in part attributed to the fact
that the 5f, 6d and 7s levels are of comparable energies. The elements, in the first
half of the series frequently exhibit higher oxidation states. For example, the
maximum oxidation state increases from +4 in Th to +5, +6 and +7respectively in
Pa, U and Np but decreases in succeeding elements.
(g) The actinoids are highly reactive metals, especially when finely divided.
(h) The magnetic properties of the actinoids are more complex than those of the
lanthanoids. Although the variation in the magnetic susceptibility of the actinoids
with the number of unpaired 5 f electrons is roughly parallel to the corresponding
results for the lanthanoids
4. POTASSIUM DICHROMATE (K2Cr2O7)
(a) Preparation: - It takes place in three steps-
1. 4FeCr2O4+ 8Na2CO3 +7O2 ⎯⎯→ 8Na2CrO4(yellow solution)+ 2Fe2O3 +8CO2
2. 2Na2CrO4 + 2H+ ⎯⎯→ Na2Cr2O7(orange sodium) + 2 Na+ + H2O
3. Na2Cr2O7 + 2 KCl ⎯⎯→ K2Cr2O7(Orange crystals)+ 2 NaCl
(b) The chromates and dichromates are interconvertible in aqueous solution
depending upon pH of the solution. 2 CrO42– + 2H+→Cr2O72– + H2O
Cr2O72– + 2 OH-→2CrO42– + H2O
(c) Potassium dichromate in acidic solution act as oxidizing agent.
• Cr2O72–+ 6I–+ 14H+→ 2Cr+3+ 3I2 + 7H2O
• Cr2O72–+ 3H2S+ 8H+→2Cr+3+ 3S+ 7H2O
• Cr2O72–+ 3Sn2++ 14H+→2Cr+3+ 3Sn4++ 7H2O
• Cr2O72–+ 6Fe2++ 14H+→2Cr+3+ 6Fe3+ + 7H2O
(d) Structure of chromates and dichromates

(e) Uses: Potassium dichromate is a very important chemical used in leather industry
and as an oxidant for preparation of many azo compounds. Potassium dichromate
is used as a primary standard in volumetric analysis.
5. POTASSIUM PERMANGNATE [KMnO4]
a) Preparation: -- It takes place in two steps:-
• 2MnO2 + 4 KOH + O2 ⎯⎯→ 2 K2MnO4 (Dark green)+ 2H2O
• 3 MnO42- +4H+ ⎯⎯→ 2MnO4-(Purple)+MnO2 +2H2O [Disproportionation]
b) Properties of KMnO4
• Potassium permanganate are isostructural with those of KClO4.
• When heated KMnO4 decomposes at 513 K.
• 2KMnO4 ⎯⎯H⎯ a t,
e
→ K2MnO4 + MnO2 + O2
• KMnO4 act as Oxidising agent in acidic, alkaline & neutral medium.
• MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e– ⎯⎯→ Mn2+ + 4H2O (Acidic)
• 2MnO4– + 16H+ + 5C2O42 ⎯⎯→ 2Mn2+ + 8H2O +10CO2
• MnO4– + 8H+ + 5Fe2+ ⎯⎯→ Mn2+ + 4H2O + 5Fe3+
• 2MnO4– + 16H+ + 10I– ⎯⎯→ 2Mn 2+ + 8H2O +5I2

50 | P a g e
 • 5NO2- +2MnO4–+ 6H+ ⎯⎯→ 2Mn 2+ + 3H2O +5NO3-
• 5SO32-+2MnO4– + 6H+ ⎯⎯→ 2Mn 2+ + 3H2O +5SO42-
• oxidising reactions of KMnO4 In neutral or faintly alkaline solutions.
• 2MnO4–+ H2O + I– ⎯⎯→ 2MnO2 + 2OH- + IO3–
• 8 MnO4– +3 S2O32- + H2O ⎯⎯→ 8MnO2 + 2OH- +6 SO42-
• 2 MnO4–+3Mn+2+ 2H2O ⎯⎯→ 5MnO2+ 4H+
6. Permanganate titrations in presence of hydrochloric acid are unsatisfactory since
hydrochloric acid is oxidised to chlorine.
7. Uses: Besides its use in analytical chemistry, potassium permanganate is used as
a favourite oxidant in preparative organic chemistry. Its uses for the bleaching of
wool, cotton, silk and other textile fibres and for the decolourisation of oils are also
dependent on its strong oxidising power.
8. Structure of Permanganate & Manganate:

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)

1. In which of the following pairs, both the ions are coloured in aqueous solutions?
[Atomic no of Sc = 21, Ti = 22, Ni = 28, Co = 27, Cu = 29]
(a) Sc3+, Ti+3 (b) Sc3+, Co2+ (c) Ni2+, Cu+ (d) Ni2+, Ti3+
2. Which of the following is most stable in aqueous solution?
(a) Mn3+ (b) Cr3+ (c) V3+ (d) Ti3+
3. KMnO4 is not acidified by HCl instead of H2SO4 because
(a) H2SO4 is stronger acid than HCl
(b) HCl is oxidised to Cl2 by KMnO4
(c) H2SO4 is dibasic acid
(d) rate of reaction is faster in presence of H2SO4
4. Manav poured some potassium chromate solution in test tube for qualitative
analysis. The yellow colour of potassium chromate soon turned orange in colour.
Manav realised that this happened because the test tube was not clean and
contained a few drops of some liquid. Which of the following were the liquid drops
most likely to be.
(a) Drops of water (b) methyl orange solution (c ) NaOH solution (d) HCl solution
5. Generally, transition elements form coloured salts due to the presence of unpaired
electrons. Which of the following compounds will be coloured in solid state?
(a) Ag2SO4 (b) CuF2 (c) ZnF2 (d) Cu2Cl2
6. When KMnO4. solution is added to oxalic acid solution, the decolourisation is slow
in the beginning but becomes instantaneous after some time because
(a) CO2 is formed as the product. (b) Reaction is exothermic.
(c) MnO4– catalyses the reaction. (d) Mn2+ acts as auto catalyst.
7. Which of the following are d-block elements but not regarded as transition
elements?
(a) Cu, Ag, Au (b) Zn, Cd, Hg (c) Fe, Co, Ni (d) Ru, Rh, Pd
8. Transition elements form alloys easily because they have
(a) Same atomic number (b) Same electronic configuration
(c) Nearly same atomic size (d) None of the above.
9. Which of the following ion has magnetic moment value of 5.9?
(a) Mn2+ (b) Fe2+ (c) Ni2+ (d) Cu2+
10. Which of the following lanthanoids show +2 oxidation state besides the
characteristic oxidation state +3 of lanthanoids?
(a) Ce (b) Eu (c) Tb (d) Dy.

51 | P a g e
 ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARKS)
In the Following questions a statement of Assertion(A) is followed by a statement
of Reason(R). Select the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c. A is true but R is false.
d. A is false but R is true.
11. Assertion(A) : Magnetic moment values of actinides are lesser than the
theoretically predicted values.
Reason(R) : Actinide elements are strongly paramagnetic.
12. Assertion(A) : KMnO4 act as an oxidising agent in acidic, basic or neutral
medium.
Reason(R) : KMnO4 oxidises ferrous sulphate to ferric sulphate.
13. Assertion(A) : Of the 3d4species Cr2+ is strongly reducing and Mn3+ is strongly
oxidising.
Reason(R) : Cr+3 state is stable due to half-filled t2g set, Mn+2 is stable due to
half- filled d orbitals
14. Assertion(A) :In the series Sc to Zn the enthalpy of atomisation of Zinc is the
lowest.
Reason(R): Zinc has greater number of unpaired electrons
15. Assertion(A) :Magnetic moment of Mn2+ is less than that of Cr2+.
Reason(R): Magnetic moment depends on the number of unpaired electrons.
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS( 1 MARK)
16. Which element has highest melting point in 3d series ?
17. Out of Cu2Cl2 and CuCl2 which is more stable in aqueous solution.
18. Which element of the first transition series don’t exhibit variable oxidation states?
19. Name an oxo anion having oxidation number of metal (3d series) equal to its
groupnumber.
20. Name two elements of 3d series which show anomalous electronic configuration.
21. Identify the Transition metal of 3d series that acts as a strong reducing agent in +2
oxidation state in aqueous solution.
22. Name a member of lanthanoid series which is well-known to show +4 oxidation
state.
23. Among the elements of 3d series which element is soft?
24. Arrange the following in increasing order of acidic character: CrO3,CrO, Cr2O3
25. Complete the following equation :
3MnO42- +4H+
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
26. Name an important alloy which contains some of the lanthanoid metals. Mention
its uses.
27. Among Elements of 3d transition series: Write the element
(a) Which is not regarded as transition element.
(b) Which shows maximum number of oxidation states.
(c) Which forms stable divalent(M2+) ion
(d) Which shows only +3 state?
28. What is Lanthanoid contraction? Give its cause. What are its Consequences?
29. When pyrolusite ore MnO2 is fused of with KOH in presence of air,a green
coloured compound (A) is obtained which undergoes disproportionation reaction
in acidic medium to give purple coloured compound (B).
(i) Write the formulae of (A) & (B).
(ii) What happens when compound (B) is heated.
30. When chromite ore FeCr2O4 is fused with NaOH or (Na2CO3) in presence of air, a
yellow coloured compound (A) obtained which on acidification with dilute

52 | P a g e
 sulphuric acid gives a compound (B). Compound (B) on reaction with KCl forms
an orange coloured crystalline compound (C).
(a) Write the formulae of (A), (B) & (C).
(b) Write one use of compound (C).
SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)
31. Explain giving a suitable reason for each of the following
(a) Metal –metal bonding is more frequent for the 4d & 5d series of
transition metals than that for the 3d series.
(b) Cu+ salts are colourless while Cu2+ salts are Coloured
(c) Mn2+ exhibits maximum Para magnetism
32. Account for the following
(a) Although Zr belongs to 4d and Hf belongs to 5d transition series but it is quite
difficult to separate them.
(b) There is in general increase in density of element from titanium to copper.
(c ) Most of the transition metals and their compounds act as good catalysts.
33. Explain the following observations.
(a) Mn Shows the highest oxidation state of +7 among 3d series elements
(b) Mn Shows the highest oxidation state of +7 with oxygen but with fluorine it
shows the highest oxidation state of +4.
(c )MnO is basic while Mn2O7 is acidic in nature.
34. Account for the following
(a) Cu+ ion is not stable in aqueous solutions.
(b) The d1 configuration is very unstable in ions.
(c )Eo value for the Mn2+/Mn much more than expected.
35. Assign reasons for the following.
(a) Scandium is a transition element but Zinc is not.
(b) Silver atom has completely filled d orbital (4d10) in its ground state, yet it is
transition element.
(c )In the series Sc(Z = 21) to Zn (Z = 30), the enthalpy of atomisation of zinc is the
lowest.
LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)
36. Give Reasons for the following
(i) Ce4+ in aqueous solution is a good oxidising agent.
(ii) Actinoids contraction is greater from element to element than lanthanoid
contraction.
(iii) The actinoids exhibit a larger number of oxidation states than the
corresponding lanthanoids.
(iv) La3+ and Lu3+do not show any colour in solutions.
(v) Chemistry of all the lanthanoids are quite similar.
37. Complete & balance the following reactions: -
a) Cr2O72–+ Fe2++ H+→
b) MnO4– + H+ + C2O42- ⎯⎯→
c) KMnO4 ⎯⎯H⎯ a t,
e
→
d) MnO4 + H2O+ I- ⎯⎯→
–
e) Cr2O72– + OH-→
CASE BASED QUESTIONS
The Following questions are case based questions carries 4 (1+1+2) marks.
Read the given passage carefully and answer the questions that follow:
38. The transition metals react with a number of non-metals like oxygen, nitrogen,
Sulphur and halogens to form binary compounds. The first series transition metal
oxides are generally formed from the reaction of metals with oxygen at high
temperatures. These oxides dissolve in acids and bases to form oxo metallic salts.
Potassium dichromate and potassium permanganate are common examples.

53 | P a g e
 Potassium dichromate is prepared from the chromite ore by fusion with alkali in
presence of air and acidifying the extract. Pyrolusite ore (MnO 2) is used for the
preparation of potassium permanganate. Both the dichromate and the
permanganate ions are strong oxidising agents.
(a) What happens when Manganate ions (MnO42− ) undergoes disproportionation
reaction in acidic medium?
(b) Explain why the colour of KMnO4 disappears when oxalic acid is added to
its solution in acidic medium.
(c ) When an orange solution containing Cr2O72– ion is treated with an alkali,
a yellow solution is formed and when H+ ions are added to a yellow solution,
an orange solution is obtained. Explain why does this happen?
OR
A solution of KMnO4 on reduction yields either colourless solution or a brown
precipitate or a green solution depending on the pH of the solution. What
different stages of the reduction do these represent and how are they carried
out?
39. The d-block, which lies between s and p-blocks contains, elements of groups 3-12,
in which d- orbitals are progressively filled in each of four long periods of periodic
table. These elements are also called transition elements or metals.
The elements constituting the f-block are those in which 4 f and 5 f-orbitals are
progressively filled. They are place in a separate panel at the bottom of the periodic
table. The elements of f-block are also called inner-transition
(a) Transition metal are very good catalyst. Why? (1)
(b) Transition metals form a large number of interstitial compounds. Give reason(1)
(c) Why the paramagnetic characteristic in 3d- transition series increases up to Cr
and then decreases? (2)
OR
Out of La(OH)3 and Lu(OH)3, which is more basic and why?
40. In the periodic table, the elements are classified into mainly four blocks, i.e. s, p, d
and f. The d-block elements are called transition elements. The s-block contains
the elements of the group 3-12. They possess properties that are transitional
between the s and p-block elements. Zn, Cd, Hg do not exhibit characteristic
properties of transition elements. All the elements belong to this section are metals.
There are four rows of the transition elements involving filling of 3d, 4d, 5d and 6d
orbitals.
(a) Why does the transition element scandium not exhibit variable oxidation state?
(1)
(b) Why chromium is a typical hard metal while mercury is a liquid? (1)
(c) Fe3+/Fe2+ redox couple has less positive electrode potential than Mn3+/Mn2+
couple.Why? (2)
OR
Copper (I) is diamagnetic, whereas copper (II) is paramagnetic.
41. Within the 3d-series, manganese exhibits oxidation states in aqueous solution from
+2 to +7, ranging from Mn2+ (aq) to MnO-4 (aq). Likewise, iron forms both Fe2+ (aq)
and Fe3+(aq) as well as the FeO42- ion. Cr and Mn form oxo anions CrO42-, MnO4-,
owing to their willingness to form multiple bonds. The highest oxidation states of
the 3d-metals may depend upon complex formation (e.g., the stabilization of Co³+
by ammonia) or upon the pH (thus MnO42-(aq) is prone to disproportionation in
acidic solution). Within the 3d-series, there is considerable variation in relative
stability of oxidation states,
sometimes on moving from one metal to a neighbour; thus, for iron, Fe 3+ is more
stable than Fe2+,especially in alkaline conditions, while the reverse is true for
cobalt. The ability of transition metals to exhibit a wide range of oxidation states is

54 | P a g e
 marked with metals such as vanadium, where the standard potentials can be rather
small, making a switch between states relatively easy.
(a) Highest fluoride of Mn is MnF4 where as the highest oxide is Mn2O7 (1)
(b) Which is more stable Fe or Fe³+?
2+ (1)
(c). The higher oxidation states are usually exhibited by the members in the middle
of a series of transition elements ? (2)
OR
Electrode potential of copper E0 Cu+2 / Cu is positive, where as E0 Mn+2 / Mn is
more negative than expected Why ?
42. Potassium permanganate, (KMnO4) is prepared by fusion of pyrolusite, MnO2 with
KOH in the presence of an oxidising agent like KNO3. This produces the dark green
potassium manganate, K2MnO4 which disproportionates in a neutral or acidic
solution to give purple permanganate ion. Potassium permanganate is an important
oxidising agent in acidic, alkaline as well as neutral medium.
(a) What is the state of hybridisation of Mn in MnO4-? (1)
(b) Write an application of potassium permanganate. (1)
(c) How do the oxides of transition elements in lower oxidation states differ from
those in higher oxidation state in the nature of metal-oxygen bonding and why?
(2)
OR
Draw the structure of permanganate ion. Is it paramagnetic or diamagnetic?
ANSWERS
ANSWERS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
d b b d b d b c a b
11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
b b a c d
16. Cr
17. CuCl2, due to greater hydration enthalpy of Cu2+
18. Sc
MnO4- or CrO4 2-
19.
20. Cr, Cu
21. Cr
22. Ce
23. Zn
24. CrO < Cr2O3< CrO3
25. 3MnO42- +4H+ 2MnO4- +MnO2+2H2O
26. Mischmetal which consists of 95% of lanthanoid metals, 5% iron and traces of
S,C,Ca and Al. uses. Mischmetal is used in Mg-based alloy to produce bullets, shell
and lighter flint
27. a)Zn(b)Mn (c)Mn (d)Sc
28. Lanthanoid contraction: The regular decrease in the atomic and ionic radii of
lanthanoids with increasing atomic number is known as Lanthanoid contraction.
Cause for lanthanoid contraction: poor shielding of 4f electrons.
Consequences of Lanthanoid contraction:
(i) Difficult to separate the lanthanoids because the change in ionic radii is very
small, their chemical properties are similar. Hence, separation of lanthanoids are
difficult. (ii) Similarity in size of elements belonging to same group of second and
third transition series due to lanthanoid contraction the size of Zr (160 pm) is same
as that of Hf (159 pm).
29. (i) A= K2MnO4 B= KMnO4
(ii) 2KMnO4 ⎯⎯→ K2MnO4 + MnO2 + O2

55 | P a g e
30. (a) A = Na2CrO4 B= Na2Cr2O7 C= K2Cr2O7
(b) Potassium dichromate is used as a primary standard in volumetric analysis
31. (a) 4d and 5d transition elements (2nd and 3rd series) are Larger in size than the
corresponding 3d elements. Hence the valence electrons are less tightly held and
form M-M bond more frequently
(b) Due to the absence of unpaired electrons in d-orbitals, Cu+ salts are colourless
while due to presence of unpaired electrons in d-orbitals, Cu2+ salts are Coloured
(c) Because Mn2+ contain 5 unpaired electrons in their 3d sub shells
32. (a) because of lanthanoid contraction both Zr &Hf have similar radii and similar
properties
(b) The decrease in metallic radius coupled with increase in atomic mass results in
a general increase in the density.
(c ) The catalytic activity of transition metal ions is due to following two reasons:
Variable oxidation states & Large surface area.
33. (a) Total 7 electrons are present in 3d and 4s in Mn and hence it can
exhibit maximum oxidation state of +7
(b) Because of ability of oxygen to form multiple bonds using 2p orbitals
of oxygen and 3d orbitals of Mn.
(c) Mn in Mn2O7 is in +7 oxidation state and Mn maximum oxidation state is +7.
Hence it is Acidic. If an element in a compound is in lower oxidation state then it
will show basic character. Mn is in+2 oxidation state in MnO hence basic.
34. (a) It disproportionate to give Cu2+ and Cu. Or Due to greater hydration enthalpy of
Cu2+
b) The ions in d1 configuration tend to lose one more electron to get into stable d0
configuration.
c) due to greater stability of half-filled d-subshell (d5) in Mn+2
35. (a) Scandium is a transition element because it has incompletely filled d orbitals
but Zinc has completely filled d orbitals i.e 3d10 configuration
(b) Silver (Z = 47) can exhibit +2 oxidation state wherein it will have incompletely
filled d-orbitals (4d), hence a transition element.
(c) because in the formation of metallic bonds, no electrons from 3d-orbitals are
involved in case of zinc, while in all other metals of the 3d series, electrons from the
d-orbitals are always involved in the formation of metallic bonds
36. (i) because it can readily change to the most stable +3 oxidation state by gaining
one electron (
ii) due to greater poor shielding by 5f-electrons in actinoids than that by 4f-electrons
in the lanthanoids
(iii) because of the very small energy gap between 5f, 6d and 7s subshells.
(iv) due to absence of unpaired electron in f orbital
(v) The change in the size of the lanthanoids due to lanthanoid contraction is very
small
37. (a) Cr2O72–+ 6Fe2++ 14H+→2Cr+3+ 6Fe3+ + 7H2O
(b) 2MnO4– + 16H+ + 5C2O42 ⎯⎯→ 2Mn2+ + 8H2O +10CO2
(c) KMnO4 ⎯⎯→ K2MnO4 + MnO2 + O2
(d) 2 MnO4–+ H2O + I– ⎯⎯→ 2MnO2 + 2OH- + IO3–
(e) Cr2O72– + 2 OH-→2CrO42– + H2O
38. (a) MnO42− ions disproportionate in acidic medium to give Permanganate ions and
Manganese(IV) oxide. 3MnO42− + 4 H+ → 2MnO4− + MnO2 + 2H2O
(b) This is a redox titration. The deep purple colour of KMnO4 disappears due to the
formation of MnSO4
(c ) When Cr2O72– ion is treated with an alkali :
Cr2O72– (orange) + 2 OH-→2CrO42–(yellow) + H2O

56 | P a g e
 When the yellow solution is treated with an acid, we get back the orange solution:
2 CrO42– (yellow)+ 2H+→Cr2O72–(orange) + H2O
OR
In acidic medium, permanganate changes to manganous ion which is colourless.
MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e– ⎯⎯→ Mn2+ (colourless) + 4H2O
In alkaline medium, permanganate changes to manganate, which is a green
solution
MnO4-+ e- → MnO42- (green)
In a neutral medium, permanganate changes to manganese dioxide which is a
brown precipitate,
MnO4– + 2H2O + 3e-→ MnO2 (brown) + 4OH-
39. (a) due to variable oxidation state and provides suitable surface area for the reactant
molecule to adsorb on it.
(b) because small sized atom such C.H, N,O etc. occupy the interstitial site.
(c) because up to Cr the number of unpaired electron increases and there after due
to pairing in d orbital the number of unpaired electron decreases. So magnetic
character decreases.
OR
La(OH)3 is more basic, Lu(OH)3 is less basic. Size of Lanthanoids ion decreases from
La3+ to Lu3+, tendency to give hydroxyl ion decreases so basic character decreases.
40. (a) outer electronic configuration of Sc[Ar]3d 1 4s2. Hence, it shows +3 as the only
oxidation state, by losing the three electrons it acquires a noble gas configuration.
(b) Cr have 3d5 4s1configuration. Hence, metallic bond is very strong. In Hg, all d
orbitals are fully filled, hence the metallic bond is very weak.
(c) In Mn2+, d5 configuration leads to extra stability of half-filled configuration. So
Mn3+/(d4)tends to get converted to stable d5,onfiguration of Mn2+ by accepting an
electron so Mn3+/Mn2+ redox couple has more positive electrode potential than
Fe3+/Fe2+
OR
Cu+ = [Ar] 3d10 have no unpaired electron, so diamagnetic but Cu2+ = [Ar] 3d9
configuration so have one unpaired electron, hence paramagnetic.
41. a) As oxygen stabilises highest oxidation state more than Florine by forming
multiple bonds.
(b) Fe3+
(c) It is due to greater number of unpaired electrons in (n-1)d and ns orbitals at
the middle of the series. The lesser number of oxidation states at the extreme
ends stems from either too few electrons to lose or share.
OR
Ans due to less hydration enthalpy of Cu+2 .The high energy to form From Cu (s)
to Cu+2 (aq) is not balanced by its hydration enthalpy. due to low sublimation
enthalpy of Mn and stable half filled d5 configuration of Mn2+
42. (a) Sp3
(b) It is used as an oxidising agent
(c) In the lower oxidation state the transition metal oxides are basic and they are
acidic if the metal is in higher oxidation state. The oxides are amphoteric when the
metal ion is in intermediate oxidation state..
OR

Tetrahedral, diamagnetic.

57 | P a g e
58 | P a g e
 5. COORDINATION COMPOUNDS
Quick Revision Points
Werner’s theory
In coordination compounds, metals show two types of linkages (valences)-primary and
secondary.
Primary valences Secondary valences
are ionisable and satisfied by negative are non-ionisable and satisfied
ions. by neutral molecules or negative
ions
It is equal to the coordination
number
Difference between a double salt and a complex salt
Double salts Complex salts
Dissociate into simple ions completely Do not dissociate into simple
when dissolved in water. ions in water
e.g. Mohr’s salt, FeSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O e.g. K4[Fe(CN)6].Complex ion
[Fe(CN)6]4- does not dissociate
into Fe2+ and CN− ions.
Important Terms
(a) Coordination entity - A coordination entity constitutes a central metal atom or ion
bonded to a fixed number of ions or molecules.
e.g., [CoCl3(NH3 )3] is a coordination entity.
(b) Central atom/ion - In a coordination entity, the atom/ion to which a fixed number of
ions/groups are bound in a definite geometrical arrangement around it, is called the
central atom or ion.
(c) Ligands -Ions or molecules bound to the central atom/ion in the coordination entity
are called ligands.
Unidentate ligand Is bound to a metal ion through a single
donor atom. e.g.,Cl−,H2O or NH3
Didentate ligand Is bound to a metal ion through two donor
atoms. e.g.,H2NCH2CH2NH2 (ethane-
1,2-diamine) C2O42− (oxalate ion)

Polydentate ligand It is linked to a metal ion through several

donor atoms.
e.g., Ethylenediaminetetraacetate ion
(EDTA ) is a hexadentate ligand.
Chelate ligand When a di or polydentate ligand uses its
two or more donor atoms to bind to a
single metal ion, it is said to be a chelate
ligand.
Ambidentate ligand. Can bind to the central metal atom
through any of the two donor atoms present
in it. e.g., NO2−, SCN−,CN-

59 | P a g e
(d) Coordination number – It is the number of ligand donor atoms to which the metal is
directly bonded.
[Ni(NH3)4]2+ - the coordination number of Ni is 4
[Fe(C2O4)3 ]3– - the coordination number of Fe is 6
(e) Homoleptic and heteroleptic complexes
Homoleptic complexes Heteroleptic complexes
Metal is bound to only one kind of Metal is bound to more than one kind
donor groups e.g.,[Co(NH3)6] 3+ of donor groups. e.g.,[Co(NH3)4Cl2]+

IUPAC names of some coordination compounds

1 K2[Zn(OH)4] Potassium tetrahydroxozincate(II)
2 K3[Al(C2O4)3] Potassium trioxalatoaluminate(III)
3 [Pt(NH3)BrCl(NO2)]– Amminebromidochloridonitrito-N-platinate(II) ion
4 [CoCl2(en)2]Cl Dichloridobis(ethane-1,2-diamine)cobalt(III) chloride
5 [Ni(CO)4] Tetracarbonylnickel(0)
Isomerism in Coordination Compounds
Stereoisomerism
Stereoisomers have the same chemical formula and chemical bonds but they have
different spatial arrangements.
(i) Geometrical isomerism (ii) Optical isomerism
Geometrical Isomerism -This type of isomerism arises in heteroleptic
complexes due to different possible geometric arrangements of the ligands
COORDINATION [Ma2b2]
NO-4 [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
(Square planar
complexes)
Tetrahedral complexes do not show geometrical isomerism.
Reason: The relative positions of the unidentate ligands attached to the
central metal atom are the same with respect to each other
COORDINATION [Ma2b4 ]
NO 6 [Co(NH3)4Cl2 ]+
(Octahedral
complexes)

[Ma-a2b2]
[CoCl2(en)2]+

[Ma3b3]
[Co(NH3)3(NO2)3]

60 | P a g e
 Optical Isomerism: Optical isomers are mirror images that cannot be
superimposed on one another and are called as enantiomers.
Optical isomers of [Co(en)3] +3

Optical isomers of [CoCl2(en)2] +

Trans isomer of [CoCl2 (en)2] + does not show optical activity as it has a plane of
symmetry.

Structural isomerism
Structural Isomerism: These are isomers which differ in the structural arrangement of
ligands around the central atom.
Ionisation Arises when the counter ion in a complex salt is itself a
Isomerism potential ligand and can displace a ligand
[Co(NH3)5SO4]Br and [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4.
Linkage Seen in a coordination compound containing ambidentate
Isomerism ligand
[Co(NH3)5(NO2)]Cl2 and [Co(NH3)5(ONO)]Cl2
Coordination Arises from the interchange of ligands between cationic
Isomerism and anionic entities
[Co(NH3)6][Cr(CN)6] and [Cr(NH3)6][Co(CN)6]
Solvate Arises due to the presence of solvent molecules as a ligand
Isomerism or as free solvent molecules in the crystal lattice.
[Cr(H2O)6]Cl3 and [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2.H2O

Bonding in Coordination Compounds

Valence Bond Theory
According to this theory, the metal atom or ion under the influence of ligands can use its
(n-1)d, ns, np or ns, np, nd orbitals for hybridisation to yield a set of equivalent orbitals
of definite geometry.

Complex/ion Configuration Hybridisation Geometry No of Magnetic

of the metal of the metal unpaired behaviour
ion/atom ion/atom electrons
[NiCl4]2- Ni2+ - 3d84s0 sp3 Tetrahedral 2 Paramagnetic
[Ni(CO)4] Ni -3d84s2 sp3 Tetrahedral 0 Diamagnetic
[Ni(CN)4]2- Ni2+ - 3d84s0 dsp2 Square 0 Diamagnetic
planar

61 | P a g e
 [Co(NH3)6] +3 Co+3 - 3d64s0 d2sp3 Octahedral 0 Diamagnetic
(Inner
orbital
complex -
3d used)
[CoF6 ]3- Co+3 - 3d64s0 sp3d2 Octahedral 4 Paramagnetic
(Outer
orbital
complex -
4d used)
Crystal Field Theory
(a) Crystal field splitting in octahedral coordination entities

The splitting of degenerate levels due to the presence of ligands in a definite geometry is
termed as crystal field splitting
Ligands arranged in a series in the order of increasing field strength is termed as
Spectrochemical series
Weak field ligands Strong field ligands
∆o < P ∆o > P
Form high spin complexes Form low spin complexes
d Configuration
4

t2g3eg1
t2g4eg0
(b) Crystal field splitting in tetrahedral coordination entities

62 | P a g e
Colour of coordination compounds
The crystal field theory attributes the colour of the coordination compounds to d-d
transition of the electron.
In the absence of a ligand, crystal field splitting does not occur and hence the substance
is colourless. For example, the removal of water from [Ti(H2O)6 ]Cl3 on heating renders it
colourless.
Bonding in Metal Carbonyls
In metal carbonyls, the M–C σ bond is formed by the donation of lone pair of electrons on
the carbonyl carbon into a vacant orbital of the metal. The M–C π bond is formed by the
donation of a pair of electrons from a filled d orbital of metal into the vacant antibonding
π* orbital of carbon monoxide. The metal to ligand bonding creates a synergic effect which
strengthens the bond between CO and the metal.

Multiple Choice Questions

1 Write the no. of ions produced from the complex K4[Fe(CN)6] in
solution
(A) 2 (B) 5
(C) 4 (D) 1
2 The denticity of EDTA ligand is
4-

(A) 6 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 2
3 Of the following complexes, which one will show linkage isomerism?
(A) [Cr(NH3)6][Co(en)3] (B) [Cr(NH3)6]Cl3

(C) [Cr(en)3]Cl3 (D) [Cr(NH3)5NO2]Cl2

4 The crystal field splitting energy for octahedral and tetrahedral

complexes is related as
(A) Δt = 2/9 Δo (B) Δo = 2/9 Δt
(C) Δt = 4/9 Δo (D) Δo = 4/9 Δt
5 The type of isomerism shown by the complex [CoCl2(en)2] is
(A) Geometrical isomerism (B) Ionization isomerism
(C) Coordination isomerism (D) Linkage isomerism
6 The coordination number and oxidation state of Cr in K3[Cr(C2O4)3]
are respectively
(A) 3 and +3 (B) 3 and 0
(C) 6 and +3 (D) 4 and +2
7 The geometry and magnetic behaviour of the complex [Ni(CO)4] are
(A) Square planar and (B) Tetrahedral and diamagnetc
paramagnetic
(C) Square planar and (D) Tetrahedral and
diamagnetic paramagnetic

63 | P a g e
8 Which of the following complex has minimum magnitude of crystal
field splitting?
(A) [Co(NH3)6]3+ (B) [Cr(H2O)6]3+
(C) [Cr(CN)6]3- (D) [CoCl6]3-
9 The core atom of which of the following biologically significant
coordination molecules is cobalt?
(A) Vitamin B12 (B) Haemoglobin
(C) Chlorophyll (D) Carboxypeptidase-A
10 How many isomers are possible for the complex [Co(NH3)4Cl2]Cl?
(A) 4 (B) 2
(C) 1 (D) 3

Assertion and Reason Based Questions

Given below are two statements labelled as Assertion (A) and Reason (R)
Select the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(C) A is true but R is false.
(D) A is false but R is true
11 Assertion: CuSO4 solution mixed with aqueous ammonia in 1:4 molar
ratio gives the test of Cu2+ ion.
Reason: Cu 2+ ion forms a complex with ammonia.
12 Assertion: Linkage isomerism arises in coordination compounds
containing ambidentate ligand.
Reason: Ambidentate ligand has two donor atoms.
13 Assertion: The spin-only magnetic moment of [MnBr4 ]2– is 5.9 BM
Reason: The shape of the complex is square planar.
14 Assertion: Low spin tetrahedral complexes are not formed.
Reason: Orbital splitting energies for tetrahedral complexes are
sufficiently large for forcing pairing.
15 Assertion: The complex [Ti(H2O)6]3+ is colourless.
Reason: Crystal field splitting occurs in presence of ligands.
Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark)
16 Write the IUPAC name of [Cr(H2O)2(C2O4 )2]-.
17 Which of the following is more stable complex and why?
[Co(NH3)6]3+ and [Co(en)3]3+
18 Write down the formula of : Tetraammineaquachloridocobalt(III)
chloride.
19 When a coordination compound CrCl3.6H2O is mixed with AgNO3, 2
moles of AgCl are precipitated per mole of the compound. Write the
structural formula of the complex.
20 Define denticity of a ligand.
21 Indicate the types of isomerism exhibited by the following complex:
[Co(en)3]Cl3 (en = ethylene diamine)
22 What type of isomerism is shown by the complex [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3?
23 Out of the following two coordination entities which is chiral (optically
active)?
(a) cis-[CrCl2(ox)2]3- (b) trans-[ CrCl2(ox)2]3–
24 Find the primary and secondary valences of cobalt in [Co(NH3)6]Cl3.

64 | P a g e
25 Give two examples of ligands which form coordination compounds
useful in analytical chemistry.

Short Answer Questions TYPE-1 ( 2 Marks)

26 Draw the structures of optical isomers of each of the following
complex ions:
[Cr(C2O4)3]3-, [PtCl2(en)2]2+
27 Give a chemical test to distinguish the following pair.
[Co(NH3)5Cl]SO4 and [Co(NH3)5(SO4)]Cl.
28 [Fe(H2O)6]3+ is strongly paramagnetic whereas [Fe(CN)6]3- is weakly
paramagnetic. Explain.(At. no. Fe = 26)
29 What is meant by the chelate effect? Give an example.
30 CuSO4.5H2O is blue in colour while CuSO4 is colourless. Why?

Short Answer Questions TYPE-2 (3Marks)

31 (i) Draw the geometrical isomers of [Fe(NH3)2(CN)4 ] –.
(ii) Why is geometrical isomerism not possible in tetrahedral
complexes having two different types of unidentate ligands
coordinated with the central metal ion ?
32 Discuss briefly giving an example in each case the role of
coordination compounds in :
(i) biological systems,
(ii) medicinal chemistry
(iii) extraction/metallurgy of metals.
33 For the complex [Fe(en)2Cl2]Cl,(en = ethylene diamine), identify
(i) the oxidation number of iron,
(ii) the hybrid orbitals and the shape of the complex,
(iii) the magnetic behaviour of the complex,
(iv) the number of geometrical isomers,
(v) whether there is an optical isomer also, and
(vi) name of the complex. (At. no. of Fe = 26)
34 Write the state of hybridization, the shape and the magnetic
behaviour of the following complex entities :
(i) [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]Cl
(ii) [Co(en)3]Cl3
(iii) K2[Ni(CN)4]
35 Explain why [Fe(H2O)6]3+ has magnetic moment value of 5.92 BM
whereas [Fe(CN)6]3– has a value of only 1.74 BM.

Long Answer Questions (5 Marks)

36 (i) Define the following.
(a) Heteroleptic complexes
(b) Spectrochemical series
(c) Coordination polyhedron
(ii)Give reason.
(a) The pi complexes are known for transition elements only.
(b) CO is a stronger ligand than NH3 for many metals.

65 | P a g e
 37
(i) Using crystal field theory, write electronic configuration of the
central metal atom/ion and determine the magnetic moment value in
the following.
(a)[CoF6]3–
(b)[Fe(CN)6]4–
(c)[Fe(H2O)6]2+
(ii) A solution of [Ni(H20)6]2+ is green but a solution of [Ni(CN)4]2-is
colourless. Explain.
Case-Based Questions
Read the passage carefully and answer the questions that follow.
38 Alfred Werner, a Swiss chemist was the first to formulate his idea about
the structure of coordination compounds. He proposed the concept of
primary and secondary valences for a metal ion. The primary valences are
normally ionisable and satisfied by negative ions. The secondary valences
are non-ionisable and it is equal to coordination number and is fixed for a
metal. The groups bound by the secondary linkages to metal have spatial
arrangements corresponding to different coordination numbers.
Octahedral, tetrahedral and square planar geometrical shapes are more
common in coordination compounds of transition metals.
Double salts and coordination complexes are formed by the combination
of two or more stable compounds in stoichiometric ratio. Double salts are
dissociated into simple ions completely when dissolved in water whereas
complexes do not dissociate completely into its ions. Werner was the first
to discover optical activity in certain coordination compounds.
(i) What is the oxidation number of cobalt in coordination entity
[Co(H2O)(CN) (en)2]2+?
(ii) What is the coordination number of chromium in
K[Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)2]?
(iii) Arrange the following complexes in increasing order of conductivity of
their solution. Give reason.
[Co(NH3)3Cl3], [Co(NH3)4Cl2] Cl, [Co(NH3)6] Cl3, [Co(NH3)5Cl] Cl2
OR
(iii)a) How many ions are produced from the complex [Co (NH 3)6]Cl3 in
solution?
b) When 1 mol CrCl3.6H2O is treated with excess of AgNO3, 3mol of
AgCl are obtained. Write the formula of the complex.

66 | P a g e
39 Valence bond theory considers the bonding between metal ion and ligands
as purely covalent. On the other hand, crystal field theory considers the
metal-ligand bond to be ionic arising from electrostatic interaction between
the metal ion and the ligands. In coordination compounds, the interaction
between the ligand and the metal ion causes the five d-orbitals to split-up.
This is called crystal field splitting and the energy difference between the
two sets of energy levels is called crystal field splitting energy. The crystal
field splitting (Δo) depends upon the nature of the ligand and the charge of
the metal ion.The electronic configuration of the metal ion in the complexes
depends on the relative values of Δo and P (pairing energy)
If Δo < P, then complex will be high spin.
If Δo > P, then complex will be low spin.
(i) Calculate the magnetic moment of the metal ion in the complex
K4[(Fe(CN)6].
(ii) On the basis of crystal field theory, write the electronic configuration of
d4 in terms of t2g and eg in an octahedral field when ΔO > P.
(iii) Explain the violet colour of [Ti (H2O)6]3+ complex on the basis of the
crystal field theory. (Atomic number of Ti = 22)
OR
(iii) State the magnetic property of each of the following complexes.
a) Hexaaminechromium (III) ion (At no of Chromium = 24)
b) Tetraamminezinc(II) ion (At number of Zinc =30)
40 In metal carbonyls, there is synergic bonding interaction between metal
and carbon monoxide. This leads to increase in strength of metal ligand
bond and decrease in bond order of CO in carbonyl complex. Donation of
electrons from a filled d-orbital of metal into the vacant antibonding
π* bonding orbital of CO decreases the bond order three to two and half or
slightly more thus increasing the bond length between C– O.

(i) What type of bond is exists in metal carbonyls?

(ii) How is Δ0 value affected by the interaction of CO ligands and metal ion
in metal carbonyl?
(iii) Describe the bonding between metal and CO ligand in creating a
synergic effect.
OR
(iii)Give an example of a homoleptic metal carbonyl complex and also
mention the oxidation state of the metal in it.

67 | P a g e
41 The coordination compounds are of great importance. These compounds
are widely present in the mineral, plant and animal worlds and are known
to play many important functions in the area of analytical chemistry;
metallurgy, biological system, industry and medicine. Formation of
coordination compound is largely used in analytical chemistry for the
qualitative detection and quantitative estimation of metal ions.
(i) Which ligand’s complex is used for determination of hardness of water?
(ii) Which complex is used in the treatment of cancer?
(iii) a) Haemoglobin present in Blood is a complex of which metal?
b) Name the complex of magnesium metal which is present in green plants.
OR
(iii)Describe how gold is extracted using complex formation.
42 Compounds that have the same chemical formula but different structural
arrangements are called isomers.
Ionization Isomerism-This type of isomerism is due to the exchange of
groups between the complex ion and the ions outside it.
Coordination isomerism - This isomerism occurs in compounds containing
complex anionic and cationic parts and can be thought of as occurring by
interchange of some ligands from the cationic part to the anionic part.
Linkage isomerism -This isomerism occurs with ambidentate ligands that
are capable of coordinating in more than one way.
Hydrate isomerism - This isomerism results from the replacement of a
coordinated group by a solvent molecule (Solvate Isomerism).
(i) What type of isomerism is exhibited by
[Co(ONO)(NH3)5]Cl and [Co(NO2)(NH3)5]Cl ?
(ii) What type of isomerism is exhibited by [CrCl2(H2O)4]Cl.2H2O,
[CrCl(H2O)5]Cl2.H2O,[Cr(H2O)6]Cl3 ?
(iii) What is coordination isomerism? Give one example.
OR
What is an ambidentate ligand? Explain with an example.

Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B A D C A C B D A B
11 12 13 14 15
D A C A D

16 Diaquadioxalatochromate(III) ion
17 [Co(en)3]3+ is more stable complex than [Co(NH3)6]3+ because of chelate
effect.
18 [Co(NH3)4(H2O)Cl]Cl2
19 [Cr(H2O)5Cl]Cl2.H2O
20 The number of donor atoms in a ligand which forms a coordinate bond
with the central metal atom is called denticity of a ligand.
21 Optical isomerism
22 Solvate or Hydrate isomerism
23 cis-[CrCl2(ox)2]-3
24 Primary valency -3 Secondary valency - 6
25 EDTA and Dimethyl glyoxime (DMG)

68 | P a g e
 Optical isomers of [PtCl2(en)2]2+

27 [Co(NH3 )5Cl]SO4 with BaCl2 gives white ppt of BaSO4

[Co(NH3 )5 (SO4 )]Cl with AgNO3 gives white ppt of AgCl
28 In both the cases, Fe is in oxidation state +3. Outer electronic
configuration of Fe+3 is :

In the presence of CN–, the 3d electrons pair up leaving only one unpaired
electron. The hybridisation involved is d2sp3 forming inner orbital complex
which is weakly paramagnetic.
In the presence of H 2O (a weak ligand), 3d electrons do not pair up. The
hybridisation involved is sp3d2 forming an outer orbital complex. As it
contains five unpaired electrons so it is strongly paramagnetic..
29 Chelate effect is the stabilization of coordination compounds due to
formation of metal chelates in which a didentate or a polydentate ligand
coordinate with the central metal ion forming a five or a six-membered
ring. Example

30 In CuSO4.5H2O, water acts as ligand as a result, it causes crystal field

splitting. Hence d—d transition is possible in CuSO4.5H2O and shows
colour. In the anhydrous CuSO4 due to the absence of water (ligand),
crystal field splitting is not possible and hence no colour.

31 (i) Geometrical isomers of [Fe(NH3 )2(CN)4 ] –

(ii) Tetrahedral complexes do not show geometrical isomerism because the

relative positions of the unidentate ligands attached to the central metal
atom are the same with respect to each other.
32

69 | P a g e
 (i) The pigment responsible for photosynthesis, chlorophyll, is a
coordination compound of magnesium. Haemoglobin, the red pigment 1
of blood which acts as oxygen carrier is a coordination compound of iron.
(ii) EDTA is used in the treatment of lead poisoning. Cis -platin effectively
inhibits the growth of tumours
(iii) Used in extraction of metals like silver and gold. Gold, for example,
combines with cyanide in the presence of oxygen and water to form the
coordination entity [Au (CN)2]- in aqueous solution. Gold can be separated
in metallic form from this solution by the addition of zinc

33

(vi) Dichloridobis (ethane-1, 2- diamine) Iron (III) chloride.

34 (i) [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]Cl :, Hybridization : d2sp3,Shape : Octahedral,Magnetic
behaviour: Paramagnetic
(ii) [Co(en)3] Cl3 :Hybridization : d2sp3,Shape : Octahedral, Magnetic
behaviour : Diamagnetic
(iii) K3[Ni(CN)4] : Hybridization ; dsp2,Shape : Square planar,Magnetic
behaviour: Diamagnetic
35 [Fe(CN)6]3– involves d2sp3 hybridisation with one unpaired electron and
[Fe(H2O)6]3+involves sp3d2 hybridisation with five unpaired electrons.
This difference is due to the presence of strong ligand CN– and weak
ligand H2O in these complexes.

36 (i)(a) Complexes in which a metal is bound to more than one kind of

donor groups.
(b)Ligands arranged in a series in the order of increasing field strength is
termed as Spectrochemical series
c) The spatial arrangement of ligand atoms attached to metal ion is
termed as coordination polyhedron.

(ii) (a)Transition metals have vacant d orbitals in their atoms or ions into
which the electron pairs can be donated by ligands containing
π electrons, e.g., C6H6, CH2 = CH2, etc. Thus dπ-pπ bonding is possible.
(b) Because in case of CO back bonding takes place in which the central
metal uses its filled d orbital with empty anti bonding π * molecular
orbital of CO

70 | P a g e
37(i)

(a)

(b)

No unpaired electron.Magnetic moment =0

(c )

(ii) In [Ni(H2O)6]2+, Ni is in + 2 oxidation state and having 3d 8 electronic

configuration, in which there are two unpaired electrons which do not pair
in the presence of the weak H 2O ligand. Hence, it is coloured. The d-d
transition absorbs red light and the complementary light emitted is green.
In [Ni(CN)4]2- Ni is also in + 2 oxidation state and having 3d 8 electronic
configuration. But in presence of strong ligand CN – the two unpaired
electrons in the 3d orbitals pair up. Thus, there is no unpaired electron
present. Hence, it is colourless.

38 (i) x + 0 + (-1) + (0) x2 = +2 → x = +3. Therefore O.N. of Co is +3

(ii)Coordination number = 6
(iii)Increasing order [Co (NH3)3Cl3] < [Co (NH3)4Cl2] Cl < [Co (NH3)5Cl] Cl2 <,
[Co (NH3)6] Cl3
As no. of ions in solution increases their conductivity also increases.
OR
(iii) a)4 b)[Cr(H2O)6]Cl3

39 (i)Magnetic moment= √ n×(n+2)

n=4, so μ=√4 ×(4+2)

μ=√ 24 BM
(ii)t2g4 eg0

71 | P a g e
 (iii)[Ti (H2O)6]3+is an octahedral complex. The oxidation state of Ti is +3 with
the coordination number 6. Its outer electronic configuration is 3d 1, which
means that it has one unpaired electron. This unpaired electron is excited
from t2g level to eg level by absorbing yellow light and hence appears violet
coloured/(d-d Transition)
OR
(iii) a) Paramagnetic.
b) Diamagnetic

40 (i) Synergic bonding

(ii) Δ0 value increases in metal carbonyls.
(iii) In metal carbonyl the CO to Metal bond C → M is a sigma (σ) bond. There
is also an overlapping of electrons from filled metal d orbitals into empty
antibonding orbital of CO. This results in the formation of a π bond and is and
called back bonding. The M → C bond strengthens the bond between CO and
the metal and this type of bonding creates a synergic effect.
OR
(iii)[Ni(CO)4]
Oxidation Number of Ni = zero
41 (i) EDTA
(ii) cisplatin
(iii) a)Fe b) Chlorophyll
OR
(iii)Gold combines with cyanide in the presence of oxygen and water to form
complex [Au(CN)2]-in aqueous solution. Gold is separated by the addition of
zinc.
42 (i)Linkage isomerism
(ii)Solvate/ Hydrate Isomerism
(iii)Arises from the interchange of ligands between cationic and anionic
entities
[Co (NH3)6] [Cr (CN)6] and [Cr(NH3)6][Co(CN)6]
OR
Ambidentate ligand – It is a ligand that can bind to the central metal atom
through any of the two donor atoms present in it. Ex: NO2−, SCN−

72 | P a g e
73 | P a g e
 6. HALOALKANES AND HALOARENES
QUICK REVISION POINTS
The replacement of hydrogen atom(s) in a hydrocarbon, aliphatic or aromatic, by a halogen
atom(s) result in the formation of alkyl halide (haloalkane) and aryl halide (haloarene),
respectively.
Classification: Haloalkanes and haloarenes may be classified as follows-

On the These may be classified as

Basis of mono, di, or polyhalogen (tri-,
Number tetra-, etc.) compounds
of depending on whether they
Halogen contain one, two, or more
Atoms halogen atoms in their
structures.

Compounds (a) Alkyl halides

Containing or haloalkanes
sp3 C—X (R—X)
Bond

(b) Allylic halides

(c) Benzylic
halides

Compounds (a) Vinylic

Containing halides
sp C—X
2

Bond
(b) Aryl halides

74 | P a g e
Nomenclature:

Common Name Alkyl halide

IUPAC Name Halo alkane

Methods of Preparation: 1. From Alcohols

Thionyl chloride is preferred because the

other two products are escapable gases.
Hence the reaction gives pure alkyl halides.
The reactions of 1° and 2° alcohols with HX
require the presence of a catalyst, ZnCl 2.
With tertiary alcohols, the reaction is
conducted by simply shaking with
concentrated HCl at room temperature.
The order of reactivity of alcohols with a
given haloacid is 3°>2°>1°.
2. From Hydrocarbons

(a) By free radical

halogenation

(b) By electrophilic
substitution

(c) Sandmeyer’s reaction

75 | P a g e
(d) From alkenes
(i) Addition of hydrogen
halides

(ii) Addition of halogens

3. Halogen Exchange:

Finkelstein
reaction

Swarts reaction

Physical Properties:
a) Alkyl halides are colourless when pure. However, bromides and iodides develop
colour when exposed to light. Many volatile halogen compounds have a sweet smell
b) Physical State: Lower members of alkyl halides (CH 3F, CH3Cl, CH3Br and C2H5Cl)
are colourless gases at room temperature. The higher members up C18 are colourless
liquids whereas other members are colourless solids.
c) Solubility: Despite of polar nature of alkyl halides, they are insoluble in water due
to the inability to form hydrogen bonds. Still, they are soluble in non-polar
solvents.
d) Melting and Boiling Point:
⮚ Due to greater polarity as well as higher molecular mass as compared to the parent
hydrocarbon, the intermolecular forces of attraction (dipole-dipole and van der
Waals) are more robust in the halogen derivatives. That is why the boiling points of
chlorides, bromides, and iodides are considerably higher than those of the
hydrocarbons of comparable molecular mass.
⮚ The boiling points of alkyl halides decrease in the order: RI> RBr> RCl> RF. This is
because the magnitude of van der Waal forces increases with the increase in size
and mass of halogen atom.

The boiling points of isomeric

haloalkanes decrease with an increase
in branching.

Boiling points of isomeric

dihalobenzenes are nearly the same.
However, the para-isomers are high
melting as compared to their ortho and
meta-isomers. It is due to the symmetry
of para-isomers that fits in crystal
lattice better as compared to ortho- and
meta-isomers.

e) Density: The density increases with an increase in the number of carbon atoms,
halogen atoms, and atomic mass of the halogen atoms.

76 | P a g e
 Chemical Reactions: The reactions of haloalkanes may be divided into the following
categories-
1. Nucleophilic substitution 2. Elimination reactions 3. Reaction with metals
1. Nucleophilic substitution reactions

a. CH3CH2Cl + KOH (aq) ⎯→ CH3CH2OH (Alcohol) + KCl

b. CH3CH2Br + NaOH(aq) ⎯→ CH3CH2OH (Alcohol) +NaBr
c. CH3CH2I + NaOR ⎯→ CH3CH2OR (Alkoxy alkane) +NaI
d. CH3CH2I + AgCN ⎯→ CH3CH2NC (Alkyl Isocyanide) +Ag I
e. CH3CH2I + KCN ⎯→ CH3CH2CN (Alkyl cyanide) +KI
f. CH3CH2Cl + AgNO2 ⎯→ CH3CH2 NO2 (Nitroalkane) +AgCl
g. CH3CH2Cl + KNO2 ⎯→ CH3CH2ONO(Alkylnitrite) +KI
h. CH3CH2Br +NH3 ⎯→ CH3CH2NH2 (Primary Amines) +HBr
i. CH3CH2Br +RNH2 ⎯→ CH3CH2NHR +HBr
CH3CH2Br
j. CH3CH2_H
★ Ambident nucleophiles: Groups like cyanides and nitrites possess two nucleophilic
centres and are called ambident nucleophiles. Cyanide group, linking through
carbon atom resulting in alkyl cyanides and through nitrogen atom leading to
isocyanides. Similarly, nitrite ion linkage through oxygen results in alkyl nitrites
while through nitrogen atom, it leads to nitroalkanes.
★ Haloalkanes react with KCN to form alkyl cyanides as main product while AgCN
forms isocyanides as the main product. Since KCN is predominantly ionic and
provides cyanide ions in solution. However, AgCN is mainly covalent in nature and
Nitrogen is free to donate electron pairs forming isocyanide as the main product.
Mechanism: This reaction has been found to proceed by two different mechanisms-
(a) Substitution nucleophilic bimolecular (SN2): The reaction between CH3Cl and
hydroxide ion to yield methanol and chloride ion follows second order kinetics, i.e., the
rate depends upon the concentration of both the reactants. This process is called an
inversion of configuration (Walden inversion).

(b) Substitution nucleophilic unimolecular (SN1):

77 | P a g e
 ● We can sum up the order of reactivity of alkyl halides towards S N1 and SN2 reactions
as follows:

● For the same reasons, allylic and benzylic halides show high reactivity towards the
SN1 reaction. The carbocation thus formed gets stabilized through resonance.

● For a given alkyl group, the reactivity of the halide, R-X, follows the same order in
both the mechanisms R–I> R–Br>R–Cl>>R–F.
● A SN2 reaction proceeds with complete stereochemical inversion while a S N1 reaction
proceeds with racemization.
● The stereoisomers related to each other as non-superimposable mirror images are
called enantiomers. Enantiomers possess identical physical properties namely,
melting point, boiling point, solubility, refractive index, etc. They only differ with
respect to the rotation of plane polarised light. If one of the enantiomers is dextro
rotatory, the other will be laevorotatory.
● A mixture containing two enantiomers in equal proportions will have zero optical
rotation, as the rotation due to one isomer will be cancelled by the rotation due to
the other isomer. Such a mixture is known as a racemic mixture or racemic
modification and the process is known as racemization. A racemic mixture is
represented by prefixing dl or (±) before the name.
● Retention of configuration is the preservation of the integrity of the spatial
arrangement of bonds to an asymmetric centre during a chemical reaction or
transformation.
● Inversion, retention, and racemization: There are three outcomes for a reaction
at an asymmetric carbon atom. Consider the replacement of a group X by Y in the
following reaction;
-If (A) is the only compound
obtained, the process is called
retention of configuration.
-If (B) is the only compound
obtained, the process is called
inversion of configuration.
-If a 50:50 mixture of the above two
is obtained then the process is called
racemization.

2. Elimination reactions When a haloalkane with a β-hydrogen atom is heated with an

alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide, there is the elimination of hydrogen atom from
β-carbon and a halogen atom from the α-carbon atom. As a result, an alkene is formed as

78 | P a g e
a product. Since the β-hydrogen atom is involved in elimination, it is often called β-
elimination.

If there is the possibility of the formation of more than one alkene due to the availability
of more than one α-hydrogen atom, as per Saytzeff rule, “the preferred product is that
alkene which has the greater number of alkyl groups attached to the doubly bonded
carbon atoms.” Thus, 2-bromopentane gives pent-2-ene as the major product.

Elimination versus substitution: A chemical reaction is the result of competition; it is

a race that is won by the fastest runner. A collection of molecules tend to do, by and
large, what is easiest for them. An alkyl halide with α-hydrogen atoms when reacted with
a base or a nucleophile has two competing routes: substitution (S N1 and SN2) and
elimination. Which route will be taken up depends upon the nature of alkyl halide,
strength and size of base/nucleophile, and reaction conditions. Thus, a bulkier
nucleophile will prefer to act as a base and abstract a proton rather than approach a
tetravalent carbon atom (steric reasons) and vice versa. Similarly, a primary alkyl halide
will prefer a SN2 reaction, a secondary halide- SN2 or elimination depending upon the
strength of base/nucleophile and a tertiary halide- SN1 or elimination depending upon
the stability of carbocation or the more substituted alkene.
3. Reaction with metals:

Reactions of Haloarenes:
1. Nucleophilic substitution Aryl halides are extremely less reactive towards
nucleophilic substitution reactions due to the following reasons:
(i) C—Cl bond acquires a partial double bond character due to resonance. As a result, the
bond cleavage in haloarene is more difficult than in haloalkane, and therefore, they are
less reactive toward nucleophilic substitution reaction.

(ii) In haloalkane, the carbon atom attached to halogen is sp3 hybridised while in the case
of haloarene, the carbon atom attached to halogen is sp2-hybridised.
(iii) In the case of haloarenes, the phenyl cation formed as a result of self-ionization will
not be stabilized by resonance and therefore, SN1 mechanism is ruled out.

79 | P a g e
(iv) Because of the possible repulsion, it is less likely for the electron-rich nucleophile to
approach electron-rich arenes.
Replacement by hydroxyl group

The presence of an electron-withdrawing

group (-NO2) at ortho- and para-positions
increases the reactivity of haloarenes.

2. Electrophilic
substitution
reactions

I. Halogenation

II. Nitration

III. Sulphonation

IV. Friedel-Crafts
reaction

3. Reaction Wurtz-Fitting
with metals reaction

Fitting reaction

Polyhalogen Compounds

Dichloromethane Used as a solvent as a paint remover, as a propellant in aerosols,

(Methylene and as a process solvent in the manufacture of drugs.
chloride)

80 | P a g e
 Trichloromethane The major use of chloroform today is in the production of the freon
(Chloroform) refrigerant R-22. Chloroform is slowly oxidized by air in the
presence of light to an extremely poisonous gas, carbonyl chloride,
also known as phosgene. It is therefore stored in closed dark-
coloured bottles completely filled so that air is kept out.

Triiodomethane It was used as an antiseptic but the antiseptic properties are due
(Iodoform) to the liberation of free iodine and not due to iodoform itself.

Tetrachloromethan Is used in the manufacture of refrigerants and propellants for

e (Carbon aerosol cans. When carbon tetrachloride is released into the air, it
tetrachloride) rises into the atmosphere and depletes the ozone layer.

Freons The chlorofluorocarbon compounds of methane and ethane are

collectively known as freons. They are extremely stable, unreactive,
non-toxic, non-corrosive, and easily liquefiable gases. Freon 12
(CCl2F2) is one of the most common freons in industrial use. It is
manufactured from tetrachloromethane by Swarts reaction. In the
stratosphere, freon is able to initiate radical chain reactions that
can upset the natural ozone balance.

p,p’- The DDT is effective against the mosquito that spreads malaria and
dichlorobiphenyl lice that carry typhus.
trichloroethane
(DDT)

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARK)

1. Toluene reacts with a halogen in the presence of iron (III) chloride giving ortho
and para halo compounds. The reaction is
(a) Electrophilic elimination reaction (b) Electrophilic substitution reaction
(c) Free radical addition reaction (d) Nucleophilic substitution reaction

2. Which reagent will you use for the following reaction?

CH3CH2CH2CH3 → CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl + CH3CH2CHClCH3
(a) Cl2/UV light (b) NaCl + H2SO4 (c) Cl2 gas in dark (d) Cl2 gas in the presence of iron

3. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their densities.

(a) (a) < (b) < (c) < (d) (b) (a) < (c) < (d) < (b)
(c) (d) < (c) < (b) < (a) (d) (b) < (d) < (c) < (a)

4. Which of the following is an example of vicinal dihalide?

(a) Dichloromethane (b) 1,2-dichloroethane (c) Ethylidene chloride (d) Allyl
chloride

81 | P a g e
5. Based on the position of –Br in the compound in CH3CH=CHC(Br)(CH3)2 can be
classified as halide.
(a) Allyl (b) Aryl (c) Vinyl (d) Secondary

6. Chlorobenzene is formed by the reaction of chlorine with benzene in the presence of

AlCl3. Which of the following species attacks the benzene ring in this reaction?
(a) Cl– (b) Cl+ (c) AlCl3 (d) [AlCl4]–

7. Ethylidene chloride is a/an .

(a) vicinal dihalide (b) geminal dihalide (c) allylic halide (d) vinylic halide

8. A primary alkyl halide would prefer to undergo .

(a) SN1 reaction (b) SN2 reaction (c) α–Elimination (d) Racemisation

9. Which of the following alkyl halides will undergo SN1 reaction most readily?
(a) (CH3)3C—F (b) (CH3)3C—Cl (c) (CH3)3C—Br (d) (CH3)3C—I

10. What should be the correct IUPAC name for Diethyl bromomethane?
(a) 1-Bromo-1,1-diethylmethane (b) 3-Bromopentane
(c) 1-Bromo-1-ethylpropane (d) 1-Bromopentane

ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARK)

For following questions select the most appropriate answer from the options given
below:
a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c. A is true but R is false.
d. A is false but R is true.

11. Assertion: Hydrogen halides (HX) are preferred over thionyl chloride for the
preparation of alkyl halides from alcohols.
Reason: Gaseous side products are formed in the case of thionyl chloride.
12. Assertion: Tertiary alkyl halides are least reactive towards SN1 reaction.
Reason: In SN1 reaction, the rate of reaction depends only on the concentration of alkyl
halide.
13. Assertion: Haloalkanes are sparingly soluble in water.
Reason: Haloalkanes do not form hydrogen bonds with water.
14. Assertion: Propene reacts with HBr to form 2-bromo propene.
Reason: As intermediate formed carbocation is secondary which is more stable than
primary.
15. Assertion: SN2 mechanism leads to the inversion of configuration.
Reason: As in this mechanism optical activity is lost.

VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)

16. What happens when an excess of bromine attacks on CH2=CH—CH2—C≡CH?

17. Aryl chlorides and bromides can be easily prepared by electrophilic substitution of
arenes with chlorine and bromine respectively in the presence of Lewis acid catalysts. But
why does the preparation of aryl iodides require the presence of an oxidizing agent?

18. Out of o-and p-dibromo benzene which one has a higher melting point and why?

82 | P a g e
19. Which of the following compounds (a) and (b) will not react with a mixture of NaBr
and H2SO4. Explain why?

20. Which of the products will be the major product in the reaction given below?
Explain.

21. Draw resonance structures of haloarene and find out whether the functional group
present in the molecule is ortho, para directing, or meta directing.

22. Write the structures and names of the compounds formed when compound ‘A’ with
the molecular formula, C7H8 is treated with Cl2 in the presence of FeCl3.

23. Identify the products A and B formed in the following reaction:

24. Write down the structure and IUPAC name for neo-pentyl bromide.

25. Which of the following haloalkanes reacts with aqueous KOH most easily? Explain
giving reason.
(i) 1-Bromobutane(ii) 2-Bromobutane(iii) 2-Bromo-2-methylpropane(iv) 2-Chlorobutane

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)

26. Compound ‘A’ with molecular formula C4H9Br is treated with aq. KOH solution. The
rate of this reaction depends upon the concentration of compound ‘A’ only. When another
optically active isomer ‘B’ of this compound was treated with aq. In KOH solution, the rate
of reaction was found to be dependent on the concentration of the compound and KOH
both.
(i) Write down the structural formula of both compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’.
(ii) Out of these two compounds, which one will be converted to the product with an
inverted configuration?

27. Why can aryl halides not be prepared by reaction of phenol with HCl in the presence
of ZnCl2?

28. Why is it necessary to avoid even traces of moisture during the use of a Grignard
reagent?

29. Aryl halides are extremely less reactive towards nucleophilic substitution. Predict and
explain the order of reactivity of the following compounds towards nucleophilic
substitution:

30. Cyanide ion acts as an ambient nucleophile. From which end it acts as a stronger
nucleophile in the aqueous medium? Give a reason for your answer.

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)

31. Some alkyl halides undergo substitution whereas some undergo elimination reaction
on treatment with bases. Discuss the structural features of alkyl halides with the help of
examples that are responsible for this difference.

83 | P a g e
32. What happens when
(i) n-butyl chloride is treated with alcoholic KOH,
(ii) bromobenzene is treated with Mg in the presence of dry ether,
(iii) chlorobenzene is subjected to hydrolysis,
(iv) ethyl chloride is treated with aqueous KOH,
(v) methyl bromide is treated with sodium in the presence of dry ether

33. Case-based question (4 Marks)

Case 1
The substitution reaction of alkyl halides occurs in S N1 and SN2 mechanism, whatever
mechanism alkyl halide follow for substitution reaction to occur, the polarity of the carbon
halogen bond is responsible for the substitution reaction. The rate of S N1 reactions is
governed by the stability of carbocation whereas for S N2 reactions steric factor is a deciding
factor. If the starting material is a chiral compound, we may end up with an inverted
product or racemic mixture depending upon the type of mechanism followed by alkyl
halide.

1. Among 1-brompro ane and 2-methyl-2brom pro ane, whic wil fol w SN1
mechanism? 1
2. Among following in which inversion of configuration will occur on reaction with aq alkali
1-bromo propane, and 2-methyl-2-bromo butane
1
3. What is the role of polar protic solvent in SN1 reaction? (2)
OR
How will a protic solvent system affect the SN2 reaction? (2)

Case 2
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) described as ‘miracle chemicals’ have no natural resources.
They were first manufactured in the 1930s and industries soon found variety of
applications for them due to their chemical non-reactivity and heat absorbing properties.
CFCs have been used as refrigerants in air conditioners and refrigerators, in aerosol
spray cans, in manufacturing foams and as cleansing agents in the manufacture of
electronics. These chemicals have been given the tradename ‘Freons’ and the term since
became a household name.
1. What is ‘Freon – 12’? (1)
2. Draw its molecular structure (1)
3. State any two harmful effects of CFCs on the environment. (2)
OR
3. State any two ways to reduce the harmful effect of CFCs. (2)
Case 3
Alkyl Halides can be readily prepared from Alkenes by addition reactions with Hydrogen
Halides. When the alkene is symmetrical about the double bond, only one product is
obtained. But if the alkene is unsymmetrical the addition of Hydrogen Bromide results
in formation of two products. The addition of HBr to an unsymmetrical alkene in
presence of an organic peroxide also results in the formation of two products. The only
difference is in the quantities of isomeric bromides obtained in each case since the
mechanism is different.

84 | P a g e
1. What is the major product obtained when Propene reacts with HBr? What rule governs
the formation of this product? (1)
2. What mechanism is adopted in presence of Benzoyl Peroxide. (1)
3. Why does only HBr show these anomalies unlike HI or HCl. (2)
OR
3. Write the mechanism of the addition reaction of Propene with HBr in presence or in
absence of organic peroxides. (2)
Case 4
Alkyl Halides have higher melting and boiling points than Alkanes of comparable
molecular mass. The other trends observed are as follows;
i. For a given Alkyl Halide the melting point and boiling point increases with increase in
molecular mass. So, the order is RCl<RBr<RI.
ii. For a given halogen the boiling point rises with increasing Carbon number.
iii. The boiling point also varies as per the nature of the Carbon i.e primary> secondary>
tertiary.
1. Arrange CH3I, CH3F, CH3Br and CH3Cl in decreasing order of melting points. (1)
2. Which has a lower boiling point – Chloropropane or 2-Chloropropane. Why? (2)
OR
2. Arrange the following in increasing order of boiling points. (2)
(CH3)3CBr, CH3CH(Br)CH2CH3, CH3(CH2)3Br, (CH3)3CCl
3. Among the isomeric Chlorotoluene, which isomer has the highest melting point?
Case 5:
Chloroform is a colourless, volatile liquid with sweetish sickly odour and burning taste.
It is denser than water. It is soluble in organic solvents but insoluble in water. It itself
acts as a good solvent. Chloroform causes temporary unconsciousness when its vapours
are inhaled. For this reason, it was used as an anaesthetic until recently. It is also used
as a preservative for anatomical specimen and as a laboratory reagent.
1. What is the IUPAC name of Chloroform? (1)
2. How is Chloroform commercially prepared? (1)
3. Why should Chloroform be stored in dark bottles which are completely filled? Give
chemical equation in support of your answer. (2)
OR
3. Write a short note on any two-name reactions where Chloroform is used as a reagent.
(2)

ANSWERS
Multiple choice questions

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b a a b a b b b d b

85 | P a g e
Assertion & Reasoning

11 12 13 14 15

d b a a c

Very Short Answers

16 1,1,2,2,4,4-hexabromopentance formed
17 Iodination reactions are reversible in nature. To carry out the reaction in the
forward direction, HI formed during iodination is removed by oxidation. HIO4
is used as an oxidizing agent.
18 p-Dibromo benzene has a higher melting point than its o-isomer. It is due to
the symmetry of the p-isomer which fits in the crystal lattice better than the o-
isomer.
19 (b), C—O bond is more stable in (b) because of resonance.
20 ‘B’ is the major product of the reaction as per Markonikov’s rule.
21 Ortho-para directing due to increase in the electron density at ortho and para
positions.
22

23

24

25 iii); The tertiary carbocation formed in the reaction is stable

Short Answer Type
26

27 C—O bond in phenols is more stable due to resonance effect and it has double
bond character, hence breaking of this bond is difficult.
28 Grignard reagents are highly reactive and react with water to give
corresponding hydrocarbons.

29 III > II > I

30 It acts as a stronger nucleophile from the carbon end because it will lead to
the formation of C–C bond which is more stable than the C–N bond.

Long Answer Type

86 | P a g e
33. Case Study Based
Case I
1: 2-methyl-2-bromo propane
2. 1-bromo propane
3. Polar protic solvents help to stabilize both the carbocation and the anion and that
solvation of both cations and anions helps the S N1 mechanism proceed. So that's why
polar protic solvent will favor an SN1 mechanism.
OR
For SN2 reactions involving anions as the nucleophile, protic solvents act to decrease the
nucleophilicity of that anion by solvation through hydrogen bonding. The anion acquires
a “coating” of solvent molecules thus inhibiting the ability of the anion to approach the
substrate.
Case II
1. Dichlorodifluoromethane, CF2Cl2
2. Tetrahedral Structure Diagram
3. i. Depletion of Ozone layer in the Stratosphere.
ii. Green- House Effect and global warming
OR
i. Buy air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment that does not use CFCs
ii. Buy aerosol products that do not use CFCs as propellants
iii. Conduct regular inspection and maintenance of AC and refrigeration
appliance to prevent leakage.

Case III
1. 2-Bromopropane; Markovnikov’s Rule
2. Free Radical Electrophilic addition.
3. The bond dissociation enthalpy of H-Cl is large. In case of HI, the I- oxidises to
I2
OR
Refer Class XI TB for answer

Case IV
1. CH3I > CH3Br > CH3Cl > CH3F
2. 2- Chloropropane, since branching decreases surface area of contact and hence
Vander Waals Forces.
OR
(CH3)3CCl <(CH3)3CBr < CH3CH(Br)CH2CH3 < CH3(CH2)3Br
3. The para-isomer because it is symmetrical and fits better in the crystal lattice.

87 | P a g e
Case V
1. Trichloromethane
2. By direct halogenation of Methane in presence of sunlight.
3. In presence of air and sunlight, Chloroform produces poisonous gas Phosgene;
CHCl3 + O2 -> COCl2 + HCl
OR
The Reimer-Tiemann reaction is a classic organic reaction that involves the
conversion of phenols to salicylaldehyde (ortho-hydroxybenzaldehyde) in the
presence of chloroform (CHCl3) and a strong base, typically aqueous sodium
hydroxide (NaOH) or potassium hydroxide (KOH).

The Carbylamine Reaction, also known as the Isocyanide Test, involves the
reaction of primary amines with chloroform and alcoholic potassium hydroxide
to form foul-smelling isocyanides (carbylamine), which can be detected by their
characteristic odour.

88 | P a g e
89 | P a g e
 7. Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers
Quick Revision Points: -
Alcohols Phenols Ethers

Classification of Alcohols and Phenols

• Alcohols and phenols may be classified as mono–, di–, tri- or polyhydric compounds
depending on whether they contain one, two, three or many hydroxyl groups
respectively

Classification of Monohydric alcohols

according to the hybridisation of the carbon atom to which the hydroxyl group is attached.
(i) Compounds containing 𝐂𝐬𝐩�Ñ − �𝐇 bond:
(a) Alkyl alcohols (b) Allylic alcohols (c) Benzylic alcohols

–OH group is attached to —OH group is attached to a sp3 —OH group is attached to a sp3—
an sp3 hybridised carbon hybridised carbon adjacent to hybridised carbon atom next to an
atom of an alkyl group. the carbon-carbon double aromatic ring.
bond, that is to an allylic
carbon

(ii) Compounds containing 𝐂𝐬𝐩𝟐 − �𝐇 bond:

(a)Vinylic alcohol (b) Aryl alcohols or Phenols

—OH group bonded to a carbon- —OH group bonded to the sp2-hybridised carbon atom of
carbon double bond, i.e., to a vinylic an aromatic ring
carbon

Classification of Ethers
(a) simple or symmetrical ether- if the alkyl Structures of Functional Groups
or aryl groups attached to the oxygen atom
are the same. Diethyl ether, C2H5OC2H5
(b)mixed or unsymmetrical ether- if the two
groups are different. C2H5OCH3 and
C2H5OC6H5
Isomerism in Alcohols: Alcohols exhibit four types of isomerism: (i)Chain isomerism:
�64�;10�B Butan-1-ol, 2-methylpropan-1-ol (ii)Position isomerism: �63�;8�B Propan-1-ol,
propan-2-ol (iii)Functional isomerism: �62�;6�B Ethanol, methoxy methane (iv)Optical

90 | P a g e
isomerism: Monohydric alcohols containing chiral carbon atoms exhibit optical isomerism.
E.g. Butan-2-ol, Pentan-2-ol
Nomenclature of Alcohols : According to IUPAC system, ‘e’ of the parent alkane is
replaced with the suffix ‘ol’. For naming polyhydric alcohols, the ‘e’ of alkane is retained
and the ending ‘ol’ is added.
Nomenclature of Phenols: - The simplest hydroxy derivative of benzene is phenol. It is
its common name and IUPAC name. For disubstituted compounds the terms ortho (1,2-
disubstituted), meta (1,3 disubstituted) and para (1,4-disubstituted) are often used in the
common names.
Nomenclature of Ethers:- The larger (R) group is chosen as the parent hydrocarbon and
smaller group is written as alkoxy or phenoxy
Preparation of Alcohols
(1) From alkenes
(i) By acid catalysed hydration: Mechanism
Alkenes react with water in the Step 1: Protonation of alkene to form carbocation
presence of acid as catalyst to form by electrophilic attack of �;3�B+ �\�_ �;+.
alcohols.
In case of unsymmetrical alkenes,
the addition reaction takes place in
accordance with Markovnikov’s
rule

(ii) By hydroboration–oxidation:
Diborane (BH3)2 reacts with alkenes to give trialkyl boranes as addition product.
This is oxidised to alcohol by hydrogen peroxide in the presence of aqueous sodium
hydroxide

(2). From carbonyl compounds

By reduction of aldehydes and ketones:
Reducing agents : �;2 with catalyst, sodium borohydride (NaBH4) or LiAlH4.
Aldehydes yield primary alcohols whereas ketones give secondary alcohols.

(3) By reduction of carboxylic acids and esters:

(4) From Grignard reagents:

Methanal→ primary alcohol, Other aldehyde → secondary alcohol, Ketones → tertiary

alcohol

91 | P a g e
Preparation of Phenols
(1)From haloarenes

Physical Properties of Alcohols and Phenols

Boiling Points
• Increase with increase in the number of carbon atoms (increase in van der Waal’s
forces).
• In alcohols, the boiling points decrease with increase of branching in carbon chain
(because of decrease in van der Waal’s forces with decrease in surface area).
• Due to the presence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding, boiling points of alcohols
and phenols are higher in comparison to other classes of compounds, namely
hydrocarbons, ethers, haloalkanes and haloarenes of comparable molecular
masses.
Solubility
• Soluble in water due to their ability to form hydrogen bonds with water molecules.
• The solubility decreases with increase in size of alkyl/aryl (hydrophobic) groups.
• Several of the lower molecular mass alcohols are miscible with water in all
proportions.
Chemical Reactions of Alcohols and Phenols
(i) Reactions involving cleavage of O – H Bond
(a) Acidity of alcohols and phenols:
R – OH + 2Na →2R – ONa +H2 C6H5 – OH + 2Na →2C6H5 – ONa +H2
Alcohols are weaker acids than water due to (+I effect) group present in alcohols, which
decreases the polarity of -O-H bond. Acid strength of alcohols: 1° > 2° > 3° Electron
releasing group increases electron density on oxygen to decrease the polarity of – OH bond.
Order of acidity is: 𝑅�6�B�B�; > �;2�6�B3 > �66�;5�B�; > �;2�B > 𝑅�B�;. Phenol is more acidic than
alcohols due to stabilization of phenoxide ion through resonance.

Presence of electron withdrawing groups ( −�A�B2, -CN, -X) increases the acidity of phenol
by stabilizing phenoxide ion while presence of electron releasing groups (-R, -�A�;2, -OR)
decreases the acidity of phenol by destabilizing phenoxide ion. Thus, increasing acidic
strength is o-cresol < p-cresol < m-cresol < phenol < o-nitrophenol < 2, 4, 6 Trinitrophenol
(picric acid) Higher Ka and lower pKa value correspond to the stronger acid.
(b) Esterification
Alcohols and phenols react with carboxylic acids, acid chlorides and acid anhydrides to
form esters.

92 | P a g e
The introduction of acetyl (CH3CO-) group in phenols is known as acetylation.
(ii) Reactions involving cleavage of carbon – oxygen (C–O) bond in Alcohols
1. Reaction with hydrogen halides:
• Alcohols react with hydrogen halides to form alkyl halides.
ROH + HX →R–X + �;2�B
• Reactivity of Alcohols: Tertiary > Secondary > Primary
• Lucas Test: - Used to distinguish primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols
• Lucas reagent (conc. HCl and 𝑍�[�6�Y2)
• Alcohols are soluble in Lucas reagent while Alkyl halides (RX) are immiscible
and produce turbidity in solution.
• tertiary alcohols- Immediate turbidity
• Secondary alcohols- Turbidity appears After 5 minutes
• Primary alcohols- No turbidity at room temperature.
2. Reaction with phosphorus trihalides:

3. Dehydration:

Secondary and tertiary alcohols are

dehydrated under milder conditions.
For example

4. Oxidation:
• Oxidation of alcohols involves the formation of a carbon oxygen double bond with
cleavage of an O-H and C-H bonds.

• also known as catalytic dehydrogenation reactions as it involves loss of dihydrogen

from an alcohol molecule
• Primary alcohol → Aldehyde → Carboxylic acid
• Primary alcohol → Carboxylic acid (strong oxidizing agent, acidified 𝐾�@�[�B4)
• Secondary alcohol → Ketone
• CrO3 (Chromic anhydride)in anhydrous medium is used as the oxidising agent for
the isolation of aldehydes.

• A better Oxidizing agent: pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC), a complex of chromium

trioxide with pyridine and HCl. (PCC retains C=C bond, if present)

• Secondary alcohols are oxidised to ketones by chromic anhydride (CrO3).

93 | P a g e
 • Tertiary alcohols do not undergo oxidation reaction.
• When the vapours of a primary or a secondary alcohol are passed over heated
copper at 573 K, dehydrogenation takes place and an aldehyde or a ketone is
formed while tertiary alcohols undergo dehydration.

Chemical Reactions of Phenols

1. Electrophilic aromatic substitution on aromatic ring of Phenol
-OH group is activating and ortho and para directing.
Due to resonance electron density is more at o- and p- position

2. Kolbe’s reaction

3. Reimer-Tiemann reaction

Preparation of Ethers
1. By dehydration of 2. Williamson synthesis
alcohols
• an alkyl halide is reacted with sodium alkoxide.

• Better results are obtained if the alkyl halide is

primary (as tert. halide under goes elimination
reaction)

Aryl halide + sodium

alkoxide→?

94 | P a g e
Mechanism of Dehydration of Alcohol to Ether
The formation of ether is a nucleophilic bimolecular reaction (SN2) involving the attack of
alcohol molecule on a protonated alcohol

It is not appropriate
for the preparation of
mixed ether like ethyl
methyl ether.

Chemical Reactions of Ethers

1. Reactions involving Cleavage of C–O bond in ethers

Alkyl aryl ethers are cleaved at the alkyl-oxygen bond due to the more stable aryl-
oxygen bond. The reaction yields phenol and alkyl halide

When primary or secondary alkyl groups are present, it is the lower alkyl group that
forms alkyl iodide (SN2 reaction).

• when one of the alkyl group is a tertiary group, the halide formed is a tertiary halide
(SN1 reaction).

2. Electrophilic substitution
The alkoxy group (-OR) is ortho, para directing and activates the aromatic ring
towards electrophilic substitution

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)

1. What is the correct order of reactivity of alcohols in the following reaction?

a) 1° > 2° > 3° b) 1° < 2° > 3° c) 3° > 2° > 1° d) 3° > 1° > 2°

2. �6�;3�6�;2�B�; can be converted into �6�;3�6�;�B by .
a) catalytic hydrogenation c) treatment with �?𝑖𝐴�Y�;4
b) treatment with pyridinium chlorochromated) treatment with 𝐾�@�[�B4
3. The process of converting alkyl halides into alcohols involves
a) addition reaction c) substitution reaction
b) dehydrohalogenation reaction d) rearrangement reaction

95 | P a g e
4. Which of the following compounds is/are Benzylic alcohols?

a) A, B, C, D b) A,D c) B, C d) A
5. Give IUPAC name of the compound

a) 2-Chloro-5-hydroxyhexane c) 5-Chlorohexan-2-ol
b) 2-Hydroxy-5-chlorohexane d) 2-Chlorohexan-5-ol
6. IUPAC name of the following compound

a) 1-methoxy-1-methylethane c) 2-methoxypropane
b) 2-methoxy-2-methylethane d) isopropylmethyl ether
7. Phenol is less acidic than
a) Ethanol b) o-nitrophenol c) o-methylphenol d) o-methoxyphenol
8. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of boiling point.
Propan-1-ol, butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, pentan-1-ol
a) Propan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, butan-1-ol, pentan-1-ol c) Pentan-1-ol, butan-2-ol,
butan-1-ol, propan-1-ol
b) Propan-1-ol, butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, pentan-1-ol d) Pentan-1-ol, butan-1-ol,
butan-2-ol, propan-1-ol
9. Which of the following reagents can be used to oxidise primary alcohols to aldehydes?
(i) �6�_�B3 in anhydrous medium. (iii) Pyridinium chlorochromate
(ii) 𝐾�@�[�B4in acidic medium(iv) Heat in the presence of Cu at 573K.
a) (i), (ii) b) (i), (iii), (iv) c) (ii), (iii), (iv) d) (iii), (iv)
10. Which one is secondary alcohol

b) (i) b) (ii) c) (iii) d) (iv)

ANSWERS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS:
Q.No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Answer c) b) c) c) c) c) b) a) b) d)
ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARKS)
The following questions are statement of assertion followed by a statement of reason is
given. Choose the correct answer out of the following choices.
a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is correct explanation for
assertion.
b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct explanation
for assertion.
c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is wrong statement.
d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct statement.
1. Assertion: p-nitrophenol is more acidic than phenol.
Reason: Nitro group helps in the stabilisation of the phenoxide ion by dispersal of
negative charge due to resonance.
2. Assertion: Ethanol is a weaker acid than phenol.
Reason: Ethanol reacts with Na and phenol reacts with Na and NaOH

96 | P a g e
3. Assertion: o-Nitrophenol is more soluble in water than the m-and p-isomers.
Reason: m- and p- Nitrophenols exist as associated molecules because of inter
molecular hydrogen bonding.
4. Assertion: Phenols give o- and p-nitrophenol on nitration with conc. �;�A�B3 and
Sulphuric acid mixture.
Reason: —OH group in phenol is o–, p– directing.
5. Assertion: Bromination of phenol does not require the presence of Lewis acid.
Reason: -OH group attached to benzene ring has highly activating effect
ANSWERS ASSERTION REASON BASED QUESTIONS:
Q.No 1 2 3 4 5
Answer a) b) d) d) a)
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
1. Out of o-nitrophenol and p-nitrophenol, which is more volatile? Explain
Answer: - o-nitrophenol, due to intramolecular hydrogen bonding, is more volatile in
nature. In para-nitrophenol, there is intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
2. Nitration is an example of aromatic electrophilic substitution and its rate depends upon
the group already present in the benzene ring. Out of benzene and phenol, which one
is more easily nitrated and why?
Answer: -Phenol will be easily nitrated since the —OH group attached to the benzene ring
activates it towards electrophilic substitution due to +R effect.
3. In Kolbe’s reaction, instead of phenol, phenoxide ion is treated with carbon dioxide.
Why?
Answer: -Phenoxide ion is more activating than phenol towards electrophilic substitution
reaction. Hence, it undergoes electrophilic substitution with carbon dioxide, a weak
electrophile.
4. Arrange the following sets of compounds in order of their increasing boiling points:
(a) Pentan-1-ol, butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, ethanol, propan-1-ol, methanol.
(b) Pentan-1-ol, n-butane, pentanal, ethoxyethane.
Answer: - (a) Methanol, ethanol, propan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, butan-1-ol, pentan-1-ol.
(b) n-Butane, ethoxyethane, pentanal and pentan-1-ol.
5. The carbon– oxygen bond length (136 pm) in phenol is slightly less than that in
methanol (142 pm). Explain.
Answer: - This is due to
(i) partial double bond character of C-O bond because of resonance in phenol and
(ii) sp2 hybridised state of carbon of phenol to which oxygen is attached.
6. Give reasons: -

a. The bond angle in alcohols is slightly less than the tetrahedral angle (109°-28’).

b. In methoxymethane bond angle is slightly greater than the tetrahedral angle

Answer: -a) It is due to the repulsion between the unshared electron pairs of
oxygen.
b) It is due to more repulsive interaction between the two bulky methyl
groups.
7. Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds:-

Answer: -(i) 2,6-Dimethylphenol (ii) 1-Ethoxy-2-nitrocyclohexane

8. Explain the mechanism of the acid catalysed hydration of ethene.
Answer: -Step 1: Protonation of ethene to form carbocation by electrophilic attack
of �;3�B+ �\�_ �;+.

97 | P a g e
9. Ethers can be prepared by Williamson synthesis in which an alkyl halide is reacted with
sodium alkoxide. Di-tert-butyl ether can’t be prepared by this method. Explain .
Answer: -In tert-butyl halides, elimination is favoured over substitution, so alkene
is the major product formed and ether is not formed .

10. Write the equations involved in the following reactions:

a) Reimer - Tiemann reaction b) Kolbe‘s reaction
Answer:-a)

Answer:-b)

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)

1. Give reasons for the following:
a) Phenol is more acidic than ethanol.
b) Boiling point of ethanol is higher in comparison to methoxymethane.
c) (�6�;3)3�6 − �B − �6�;3 on reaction with HI gives �6�;3�B�;and (�6�;3)3�6 − �< as the main
products and not (�6�;3)3�6 − �B�; and �6�;3�<.
Answer: -
a) It is because after the removal of �;+ion the phenoxide ion formed is more stable
than ethoxide ion.
b) It is because ethanol molecules are more associated due to presence of
intermolecular H-bonding, whereas methoxymethane does not have intermolecular
H – bonding in it.
c) This reaction follows �F�A1 mechanism and the (�6�;3)3�6+(Tert. carbocation) formed
is more stable which reacts with Iodide to form tert. butyl iodide.
2. Give one chemical test each to distinguish between the following pairs of
compounds: (i) Phenol and Benzoic acid (ii) Propan-1-ol and Propan-2-ol (iii)
Methanol and ethanol.
Answer: -(i) Add �A�N�;�6�B3to each. Phenol will not react, whereas benzoic acid will give
brisk effervescence due to �6�B2.

98 | P a g e
 (ii) Add �<2 and NaOH to each one. Propan-2-ol will give yellow ppt. of iodoform
(iodoform test), whereas propan-1-ol will not give yellow ppt.
(iii) Add �<2 and NaOH to each one. Ethanol will give yellow ppt. of iodoform (iodoform
test), whereas methanol will not give yellow ppt.
3. Give the major products that are formed by heating each of the following ethers with
HI.

4. Give the structures and IUPAC names of the products expected from the following
reactions:
(a) Catalytic reduction of butanal.
(b) Hydration of propene in the presence of dilute sulphuric acid.
(c) Reaction of propanone with methyl magnesium bromide followed by hydrolysis.
Answer: -

5. Show how are the following alcohols prepared by the reaction of a suitable Grignard
reagent on methanal?

Answer: -(i)

(ii)

LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS)

(1) Give reasons for the following: -
(a) Alcohols are more soluble in water than the hydrocarbon of comparable molecular
masses.
(b) Lower alcohols are soluble in water higher alcohols are not.
(c) Ortho nitro phenol is more acidic than Ortho-methoxyphenol.
(d) 2,4,6-trinitrophenol gives sodium bicarbonate test.
(e) Alcohol reacts with sodium metal whereas ether do not.
Answer: -(a)Alcohols have hydrogen bonding whereas hydrocarbons have weak van der
Waal’s force of attraction.
(b) Due to steric hindrance higher alcohols are incapable of forming hydrogen bonding
with water and so are insoluble in water.
(c) Ortho nitrophenol is more acidic due to electron withdrawing effect of nitro group
which facilitates release of proton
(d) 2,4,6-trinitrophenol is stronger acid due to presence of three nitro group showing
electron withdrawing effect.
(e) Alcohol reacts with sodium metal due to presence of active hydrogen in it.

99 | P a g e
(2) Account for the following: -
(a) Phenol doesn’t react with NaHCO3 whereas carboxylic acid reacts.
(b) Phenol is more easily nitrated than benzene.
(c) Sodium metal can be used for drying Di ethyl ether but not ethyl alcohol.
(d) Ether acts as Lewis base.
(e) Ortho nitro phenol is more volatile than para nitro phenol
Answer: -(a) Phenol is less acidic than carbonic acid whereas carboxylic acid is more
acidic than carbonic acid.
(b) Phenol has activating group -OH which shows +R effect and so increases electron
density at ortho and para position. so, phenol gets easily nitrated
(c) Sodium metal does not react with ether whereas it reacts with alcohol.
(d) Ether has two lone pair of electrons on oxygen and also two alkyl groups showing +I
effect which helps in donation of electrons.
(e) Ortho nitro phenol has intramolecular hydrogen bonding and so molecules are less
associated with each other whereas para nitro phenol has intermolecular hydrogen
bonding.
CASE BASED QUESTIONS
Read the passage given below and answer the following questions:
Both alcohols and phenols are acidic in nature, but phenols are more acidic than
alcohols. Acidic strength of alcohols mainly depends upon the inductive effect.
Acidic strength of phenols depends upon a combination of both inductive effect
and resonance effects of the substituent and its position on the benzene ring.
Electron withdrawing groups increases the acidic strength of phenols whereas
electron donating groups decreases the acidic strength of phenols. Phenol is a
weaker acid than carboxylic acid.
1. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their acid strength: 1
mark
Propan-1-ol, 2,4,6-trinitrophenol, 3-nitrophenol, 3,5-dinitrophenol, phenol, 4-
methylphenol
Answer: - Propan-1-ol, 4-methylphenol, phenol, 3-nitrophenol, 3,5-dinitrophenol, 2,4,
6-trinitrophenol
2. Alcohols act as Bronsted bases also. Explain 1
mark
Answer: -It is due to the presence of unshared electron pairs on oxygen, which makes
them proton acceptors.
3. Draw the resonating structures of phenol and phenoxide ions 2
mark
Answer:-

OR
Explain why phenoxide ion is more stable than phenol.
Answer: -Resonance structures of phenol have charge separation due to which the
phenol molecule is less stable than phenoxide ion which has charge delocalization.

100 | P a g e
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (ONE CORRECT ANSWER)
1. Phenol reacts with Br2 in CS2 at low temperature to give
(a) o-Bromophenol
(b) o-and p-bromophenols
(c) p-Bromophenol
(d) 2, 4, 6Tribromophenol

2. The correct order of boiling points of alcohol of the same molecular mass :
(a) 1° > 2° > 3°
(b) 3° > 2° > 1°
(c) 2° > 1° > 3°
(d) 2° > 3° > 1°

3. When Phenol is distilled with zinc dust, it gives

(a) Benzene
(b) Toluene
(c) Benzaldehyde
(d) Benzoic acid

4. Which of the following cannot be made by using Williamson Synthesis:

(a) Methoxybenzene
(b) Benzyl p-nitrophenyl ether
(c) tert. butyl methyl ether
(d) Ditert. butyl ether

5. Dehydration of alcohol to ethers is catalysed by

(a) cone. H2SO4 at 413 K
(b) Hot NaOH
(c) Hot HBr
(d) Hot HNO3

ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTION

Each question consists of two statements, namely, Assertion (A) and Reason (R).For selecting
the correct answer, use the following code:

(a) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are the true and Reason (R) is a correct explanation of
Assertion (A).
(b) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are the true but Reason (R) is not a correct explanation
of Assertion (A).
(c) Assertion (A) is true and Reason (R) is false.
(d) Assertion (A) is false and Reason (R) is true.

1. Assertion (A): Phenol is more acidic than ethanol.

Reason (R): Phenoxide ion is stabilized by resonance but ethoxide ion is not.
2. Assertion (A): Phenol gives o-and p- nitrophenol on nitration with conc. HNO3 and
H2SO4 mixture.
Reason (R): -OH group in phenol is O- and P-directing.
3. Assertion (A): Alcohols have higher boiling point than ethers.
Reason (R): They can form intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

4. Assertion (A): O – nitrophenol is less volatile than P-nitrophenol.

Reason (R): Intramolecular hydrogen bonding is present in O-nitrophenol while
intermolecular hydrogen bonding is present in O-nitrophenol.

101 | P a g e
 5. Assertion (A): Lucas test can be used to distinguish between 1-propanol and 2-
propanol.
Reason (R): Lucas test is based upon the difference in reactivity of primary,
secondary and tertiary alcohols with conc. HCl and anhydrous ZnCl2.

NOMENCLATURE TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Write the IUPAC name of the following compounds.
(a) (b)

(c) (d)

(e)

2. Write the structure of the following compound whose IUPAC name are as follows:
(a) 2-methylpropan- 2-ol molecule.
(b) Hex-l-en-3-ol
(c) Butane-1,3-diol
(d) 1-phenylpropan-2-ol
(e) 2-Methoxypropane

COMPETENCY BASED QUESTIONS

REASONING TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Ortho nitrophenol has lower boiling point than p-nitrophenol. Why?
2. Ortho-nitrophenol is more acidic than ortho-methoxyphenol. Why?
3. Of the two hydroxy organic compounds ROH and R’OH, the first one is basic and other
is acidic in behaviour. How is R different from R’?
4. Which of the following isomers is more volatile : o-nitrophenol or p-nitrophenol?
5. Out of CH3OH and C6H5OH which one is more acidic and why?
6. Alcohols are more soluble in water than the hydrocarbons of comparable molecular
masses?
7. The boiling point of ethanol is higher than that of methoxymethane?
8. The C—O—H bond angle in alcohols is slightly less than the tetrahedral angle
(190°28′)?
9. (CH3)3C—O—CH3 on reaction with HI gives (CH3)3C—I and CH3—OH as the main
products and not (CH3)3C—OH and CH3—I?
10. (CH3)3C—Br on reaction with sodium methoxide (Na+ _OCH 3) gives alkene as the main
product and not an ether.
CHEMICAL TEST TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Give one chemical test to distinguish between: Propan-1-ol and Propan-2-ol
2. Give one chemical test to distinguish Phenol and Acetic acid.

102 | P a g e
3. Give one chemical test to distinguish Methanol and ethanol.
4. Give one chemical test each to distinguish between the following pair: (i)Phenol and
Propan-1-ol (ii)Ethanol and dimethyl ether (iii) propan-1-ol and 2-methyl propan-2-ol
5. Give one chemical test to distinguish (i) Ethanol and propan-1-ol (ii) Propan-2-ol and
pentan-3-ol
6. Give one chemical test to distinguish
(i) β – naphthol and ethanol
(ii) diethyl ether and n-butane
(iii) Diethyl ether and but-1-ene
NAME REACTION TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Write the following name reaction:
a) Kolbe’s reaction
b) Reimer-Tiemann reaction
c) Williamson synthesis
d) Hydroboration
e) Esterification
MECHANISM TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Write the mechanism of acid catalysed hydration of alkenes.
2. Write the mechanism of acid catalysed dehydration of ethanol to yield ethene at 443K.
3. Write the mechanism of dehydration of Alcohol to form Ether at 413 K.

CONVERSION TYPE QUESTIONS

1. How are the following conversions carried out? (i) Propane to Propan-2-ol (ii) Phenol
to acetophenone (iii) Propene to propan-1-ol
2. How will you bring about the following conversions? (i) Ethyl chloride to Ethanal (ii)
Phenol to salicylic acid (ii) Benzyl chloride to Benzyl alcohol
3. Write the chemical reactions for the following conversions. (i) Phenol to anisole (ii)
Ethyl magnesium chloride to Propan-1-ol (iii) Cumene to phenol (iv) Phenol to picric
acid
COMPLETE THE REACTIONS TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Predict the products of the following reactions :
a) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH + SOCl2 →
b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – O – CH3+ HBr →
c) C6H5 – CH2– O – C6H5 + HI —heat→
d)

ARRANGE IN CORRECT ORDER TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Arrange each set of compounds in the decreasing order of property indicated
a) Methanol, ethanol, diethyl ether, ethylene glycol. (Boiling point)
b) Phenol, O- nitrophenol, p- methoxyphenol, p- nitrophenol. (Ka value )
c) Dimethyl ether, ethanol, phenol. (Solubility in water)
d) 2-methylpropan-1-ol, n-Butanol, 2-methylpropan-2-ol (acidic nature)
e) Ethanol, n-butane, water, propane. (Boiling point)
f) Isobutane, n-butane, n- butanol, n-butyl chloride (boiling point)
g) Water, ethanol, phenol (acidity character)
h) Ethanol, isopropanol, tertiary butyl alcohol (reactivity towards Lucas reagent)
i) Methanol, ethyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, glycerol. (Solubility in water)
j) Phenol, o- nitrophenol, p-nitrophenol, m-nitrophenol (boiling point order)

103 | P a g e
WORD PROBLEM TYPE QUESTIONS
1. An organic compound A with molecular formula C8H16O2 was hydrolysed with
sulphuric acid to give a carboxylic acid B and alcohol C. Oxidation of C with chromic
acid produced B. C on dehydration gives but-1-ene. Write reactions involved.
2. When an aromatic organic compound with molecular formula C6H6O is treated with
bromine water, white precipitate of compound Y is obtained. Give the structure and
the name of X and Y and write the chemical reaction involved.
3. An organic compound ‘A’ having molecular formula C3H6 on treatment with aq. H2SO4
give ‘B’ which on treatment with Lucas reagent gives ‘C’. The compound ‘C’ on
treatment with ethanolic KOH gives back ‘A’. Identify A, B, C.
4. An organic compound A (C6H6O) gives a characteristic colour with aq.FeCl3 solution.
(A) On reacting with CO2 and NaOH at 400 K under pressure gives (B) which on
acidification gives a compound (C). The compound (C) reacts with acetyl chloride to
give (D) which is a popular pain killer. Deduce the structure of A, B, C& D.
5. An organic compound (X) when dissolved in ether and treated with magnesium metal
forms a compound Y. The compound, Y, on treatment with acetaldehyde and the
product on acid hydrolysis gives isopropyl alcohol. Identify the compound X. What is
the general name of the compounds of the type Y.

ANSWERS
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (ONE CORRECT ANSWER)
1. (b)o-and p-bromophenols
2. (a) 1° > 2° > 3°
3. (a) Benzene
4. (d) Ditert. butyl ether
5. (a) conc. H2S04 at 413 K

ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTION

1. a 2.d 3. c 4. d 5. a

NOMENCLATURE TYPE QUESTIONS

1. (a) 2-bromo-3-methylbut-2-en-1-ol (b)2. 2-Phenylethanol (c)2-Methoxy-5-methyl
phenol
(d)2, 5-dinitrophenol (e)1-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane
2 (a)

(b) CH2 = CH – CH(OH) – CH2 – CH2 – CH3 (c) CH3-CH (OH)-CH2-CH2OH

(d) (e)CH3-O-CH (CH3)2

104 | P a g e
REASONING TYPE QUESTIONS
1. Intermolecular hydrogen bonding
2. –NO2 is EWG while OCH3 is EDG so H+ release is easy from o-nitrophenol.
3. Where R=alkyl, ROH behaves as Bronsted base and where R=aryl, R’OH behaves as a
Bronsted acid.
4. o-nitrophenol due to intramolecular H-bonding.
5. Phenol, phenoxide ion is resonance stabilized.
6. Alcohols can form H-bonds with water.
7. intermolecular H-bonding.
8. Repulsion between lone pair of electrons of oxygen of alcohols.
9. (CH3)3 is tert. Carbocation which is more stable for SN1 reaction.
10. Tert. Alkyl halide undergo elimination in the presence of strong nucleophile and form
alkene.

CHEMICAL TEST TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Propan-2-ol (2*) alcohol takes 5 minutes to give turbidity with Lucas reagent
(HCl/ZnCl2)
Whereas propan-1-ol(1*) does not give test
CH3CH(OH)CH3 + HCl/ZnCl2-→CH3CH(Cl)CH3 (five minutes)
2. Add �A�N�;�6�B3to each. Phenol will not react, whereas acetic acid will give brisk
effervescence due to �6�B2.(comparison of acidic nature)
CH3COOH + NaHCO3→CH3COONa + H2O + CO2 (brisk effervescence)
3. Add �<2 and NaOH to each one. Ethanol will give yellow ppt. of iodoform (iodoform test),
whereas methanol will not give yellow ppt.
CH3CH2OH ---- I2/NaOH →CHI3 (YELLOW PPT)
4. (i) Phenol gives violet colouration with neutral FeCl3 where prop-1-ol does not
6 C6H5OH + FeCl3 → [Fe(O C6H5)6]-3 + 3H+ + 3HCl
(ii) Ethanol gives yellow ppt in Iodoform test where di methyl ether does not
CH3CH2OH + I2/NaOH → CHI3 (YELLOW PPT)
(iii) 2-methylpropan-2-ol gives turbidity immediately with Lucas reagent while propan-
1-ol does not.
5. (i)Both the alcohols are primary alcohols so can be distinguished by Iodoform test
CH3CH2OH + I2/NaOH →CHI3 (YELLOW PPT) Prop-1-ol does not perform Iodoform test
(ii) Propan-2-ol gives yellow ppt in Iodoform test where Pentan-3-ol does not
CH3CH(OH)CH3 + I2/NaOH→CHI3 (yellow ppt)
6. (i) β – naphthol gives violet colouration with neutral FeCl3 where Ethenol does not
(ii)Di ethyl ether dissolves in con. H2SO4 where n-butane does not
(iii) But-1-ene decolourises potassium permanganate solution where di ethyl ether does
not.

NAME REACTION TYPE QUESTIONS

a. Kolbe’s reaction

105 | P a g e
 b. Reimer-Tiemann reaction

c. Williamson synthesis

d. Hydroboration

e. Esterification

MECHANISM TYPE QUESTIONS

1. Step 1: Protonation of alkene to form carbocation by electrophilic attack of �;3�B+ �\�_ �;+.

2.

106 | P a g e
3. Mechanism

CONVERSION TYPE QUESTIONS

1 (i)

(ii)

(iii)

2 (i)

(ii)

(iii)

3 (i)

(ii)

107 | P a g e
(iii)

(iv)

COMPLETE THE REACTIONS TYPE QUESTIONS

a) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl + SO2 + HCl
b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH + CH3 Br
c) C6H5 – CH2 -I + C6H5 – OH
d) d.CH2 - CH (OH) - CH3

e)
ARRANGE IN CORRECT ORDER TYPE QUESTIONS
1.
a) Ethylene glycol > diethyl ether > ethanol > Methanol.
b) O- nitrophenol>, p- nitrophenol> Phenol > p- methoxyphenol.
c) Ethanol > phenol > Dimethyl ether.
d) n-Butanol> 2-methylpropan-1-ol > 2-methylpropan-2-ol.
e) Water > Ethanol > n-butane > propane.
f) n- butanol> n-butyl chloride > n-butane >Isobutane.
g) phenol> Water > ethanol.
h) tertiary butyl alcohol > isopropanol > Ethanol.
i) glycerol> ethylene glycol > methanol > ethyl alcohol.
j) p-nitrophenol> o- nitrophenol> phenol

WORD PROBLEM TYPE QUESTIONS

1. A - Butylbutanoate , B - Butanoic acid , C - Butan-1-ol

108 | P a g e
 2. X - C6H5OH ( Phenol ) Y- C6H2Br3OH ( 2,4,6-tribromophenol )

3. A- Propene B- Propan-2-ol C - 2-chloropropane

4. A- Phenol B - Sodium salicylate C- Salicylic acid D- Aspirin

5. The compound X is CH3Br ( bromomethane ) and Y is CH3MgBr ( Methyl magnesium

bromide) The compounds of the type ‘Y’ are called Grignard reagent. Y has one C atom
and acetaldehyde has 2 C atoms so 3 C containing isopropyl alcohol is produced on
acid hydrolysis.
COMPETENCY/ CASE BASED QUESTIONS
1. Read the passage given below and answer the following questions:
An organic compound (A) having molecular formula C6H6O gives a characteristic colour
with aqueous FeCl3 solution. (A) on treatment with CO2 and NaOH at 400 K under
pressure gives (B), which on acidification gives a compound (C). The compound (C) reacts
with acetyl chloride to give (D) which is a popular pain killer.
1. Name the compound A.
2. How many carbon atoms are there in compound D?
3. Write the equation and name of reaction involved in conversion (A) to (C)
OR
Write the equation for reaction of compound A with neutral FeCl3
2. Read the passage given below and answer the following questions:
Alcohol and phenols are acidic in nature. Electron withdrawing group in phenol increases
its acidic strength whereas electron donating groups decreases it. Alcohols undergo
nucleophilic substitution reactions with hydrogen halide to give alkyl halide. Oxidation of
primary alcohols yields aldehydes with mild oxidising agents and carboxylic acids with
strong oxidising agents while secondary alcohols yield ketones. The presence of –OH
groups in phenols activates the ring towards electrophilic substitution. various important
products are obtained from phenol like salicylaldehyde, salicylic acid, picric acid.
1. Give the structure of alcohol which is resistant to oxidation?
2. Name any one group that increases the acidic character of phenol.
3. Consider the following equation:
X----(i)NaOH,CO2---------- C6H5OH ---------(i)CHCl3+ NaOH ----- → Y
(ii)H+ (ii) H+
Identify X and Y

109 | P a g e
 OR
p-nitrophenol is a stronger acid than phenol while p-cresol is a weaker acid. why?
3. Read the passage given below and answer the following questions:
Although chlorobenzene is inert towards nucleophilic substitution, however it gives
quantitative yield of phenol when heated with aq. NaOH at high temperature and under
high pressure. As far as electrophilic substitution in phenol is concerned the - OH group
is an activating group, hence, its presence enhances the electrophilic substitution at o-
and p-positions.
1. Name the reaction mechanism involved in conversion of chlorobenzene to phenol?
2. Phenol undergoes electrophilic substitution more readily than benzene. why?
3. Phenol on treatment with excess of conc. HNO3 gives a yellow-coloured explosive
compound. Name the compound and give reaction involved?
OR

Give major product of reaction?

ANSWERS
Case based question 1
1. Phenol
2. 9(C9H8O4)
3. Kolbe reaction
Or
6 C6H5OH + FeCl3 ----------------→[Fe(O C6H5)6]-3 + 3H+ + 3HCl
Case based question 2
1.(CH3)3C-OH (2-Methyl propane -2-ol)
2. Nitro group (-NO2)
3. X= salicylic acid, Y= salicylic aldehyde
Or
p-nitro phenol is stronger acid than p- cresol because Nitro group is electron withdrawing
group which reduces electron density on benzene ring resulting in increase in acidic
strength.
Case based question 3
1. Unimolecular nucleophilic substitution (SN1)
2. Phenol readily undergoes nucleophilic substitution because hydroxy group in phenol is
activation group, which increases electron density on benzene ring.
3. Picric acid (2,4,6 tri nitro phenol)

Or

110 | P a g e
111 | P a g e
 8. Aldehydes, Ketones & Carboxylic Acids
Quick Revision Notes:
General formula: CnH2nO having >C=O group.
Aldehydes: where R = H, e.g., CH3CHO, HCHO,
C6H5CHO, etc.
Ketones: where R = alkyl or aryl group. e.g., CH3COCH3, CH3COC6H5,
C6H5COC6H5, etc.
Structure:

1] In aldehydes, the carbonyl group is bonded to a carbon and hydrogen while in the
ketones; it is bonded to two carbon atoms. The carbonyl compounds in which carbonyl
group is bonded to oxygen are known as carboxylic acids, and their derivatives (e.g.
esters, anhydrides) while in compounds where carbon is attached to nitrogen and to
halogens are called amides and acyl halides respectively.
2] Aldehydes, Ketones are important classes of organic compounds containing carbonyl
groups. They are highly polar molecules. They boil at higher temperatures than the
corresponding hydrocarbons and weakly polar compounds such as ethers. Lower
members are soluble in water because they can form H-bond with water. Higher
members are insoluble in water due to large size of their hydrophobic group.
3] The carbonyl carbon atom is sp2 -hybridised and forms three sigma (σ) bonds. The π
Electron cloud of >C=O is unsymmetrical. On the other hand, due to same
electronegativity of the two carbon atoms, the π-electron of the >C=C< bond is
symmetrical. The structure of the carbonyl group in aldehydes and Ketones is, not
entirely adequately represented by >C=O, nor by the alternative>C+─ O-. The real
structure or resonance hybrid lies somewhere between the following structure:

4] The IUPAC names of open chain aliphatic aldehydes and ketones are derived from the
names of the corresponding alkanes by replacing the ending –e with –al and –one
respectively.
5] General Methods of Preparation:
A} By oxidation of alcohols Aldehydes and ketones are generally prepared by oxidation
of primary and secondary alcohols, respectively.

Controlled oxidation of alcohols:

B} By hydration of alkynes:
Ethyne on hydration with HgSO4/dil.H2SO4 at 333 K forms acetaldehyde.

112 | P a g e
Propyne on hydration gives propanone.

C} By Rosenmund reduction- Hydrogenation of acyl chloride over palladium on barium

sulphate gives aldehyde.

.
D} Stephen Reaction: Reduction of nitriles in presence of stannous chloride in presence
of HCl gives imine which on hydrolysis gives corresponding aldehyde.

Nitriles are selectively reduced by DIBAL-H (Diisobutylaluminium hydride) to aldehydes.

E} From Hydrocarbons:
(i) By oxidation of methyl benzene:
Etard Reaction: Chromyl chloride (CrO2Cl2) oxidizes methyl group to a chromium complex,
which on hydrolysis gives corresponding benzaldehyde.

Gattermann-Koch reaction:
Benzene or its derivatives on treatment with carbon monoxide and HCl in presence of
anhydrous aluminium chloride or cuprous chloride (CuCl) gives benzaldehyde or
substituted benzaldehydes.

Oxidation of secondary alcohols in presence of oxidizing agent like K 2Cr2O7/H2SO4,

KMnO4, CrO3 gives ketones.
R2CH(OH) → RCOR
Acyl chloride on treatment with dialkyl cadmium (prepared by reaction of cadmium
chloride with Grignard reagent gives ketone.

113 | P a g e
From nitriles:
Nitriles on treatment with Grignard reagent followed by hydrolysis give ketones.

By Friedel Crafts acylation reaction:

Benzene or substituted benzene on treatment with acid chloride in presence of anhydrous
aluminium chloride forms ketone.

PROPERTIES:
*The boiling points of aldehydes and ketones are higher than hydrocarbons and ethers of
comparable molecular masses. It is due to weak molecular association in aldehydes and
ketones arising out of the dipole-dipole interactions. Also, their boiling points are lower
than those of alcohols of similar molecular masses due to absence of intermolecular
hydrogen bonding.
*The lower members of aldehydes and ketones such as methanal, ethanal and propanone
are miscible with water in all proportions, because they form hydrogen bond with water
NUCLEOPHILIC ADDITION REACTIONS
*Since aldehydes and ketones both possess the carbonyl functional group, they undergo
similar chemical reactions Aldehydes are generally more reactive than ketones in
nucleophilic addition reactions due to steric and electronic reasons. Sterically, the
presence of two relatively large substituents in ketones hinders the approach of
nucleophile to carbonyl carbon than in aldehydes having only one such substituent.
Electronically, aldehydes are more reactive than ketones because two alkyl groups reduce
the electrophilicity of the carbonyl carbon more effectively than in former.
Order of reactivity of aldehydes and ketones towards nucleophilic addition is :
HCHO > CH3CHO > CH3CH2CHO.
HCHO > RCHO > R CO R.
ArCHO > Ar COR > Ar CO Ar.

114 | P a g e
With HCN

With Sodium bisulphite

With Grignard reagent to produce alcohols

With ammonia derivatives

115 | P a g e
REDUCTION OF ALDEHYDES AND KETONES
Catalytic reduction to obtain alcohols

Wolff -Kishner Reduction- to obtain alkane

Clemmensen Reduction to obtain alkane

Oxidation of aldehydes and ketones:

(i) Aldehydes are oxidized to acids in presence of oxidising agents HNO3, K2Cr2O7, KMnO4

ii)Ketones are oxidized under drastic conditions i.e. with powerful oxidising agents like
HNO3, K2Cr2O7, KMnO4. at higher temperature.: ketones give mixture of carboxylic acids.

Test to distinguish aldehydes and ketones:

1]Tollen’s test: When an aldehyde is heated with Tollen’s reagent it forms silver mirror.
Tollen’s reagent is ammoniacal solution of AgNO3. Ketones do not form silver mirror and
hence do not give this test.

116 | P a g e
2)Fehling’s test: When an aliphatic aldehyde is heated with Fehling’s reagent it forms
reddish brown precipitates of cuprous oxide. Fehling’s reagent: Fehling solution A
(aqueous solution of CuSO4) + Fehling solution B (alkaline solution of sodium potassium
tartarate)
Ketones do not give this test.

ALDOL CONDENSATION:
Aldehydes and ketones having at least one α-hydrogen condense in the presence of
dilute alkali to form β-hydroxy aldehydes(aldol) or β –hydroxy ketones (ketol).

Cross aldol condensation: Aldol condensation between two different aldehydes and
ketones is called aldol condensation. If both of them contain α -hydrogen atoms, it gives a
mixture of four products.

Cannizzaro Reaction
Aldehydes which do not contain hydrogen when treated with a concentrated solution of
an alkali undergo self oxidation-reduction. As a result, one molecule of aldehyde is
reduced to corresponding alcohol while the other molecule is oxidized to the corresponding
acid.

117 | P a g e
 Haloform reaction: Aldehydes and ketones having at least one methyl group linked to
the carbonyl carbon atom i.e. methyl ketones are oxidised by sodium hypohalite to sodium
salts of corresponding carboxylic acids having one carbon atom less than that of carbonyl
compound. The methyl group is converted to haloform.

Carboxylic Acids: Carboxylic acids are the compounds containing the carboxyl
functional group (-COOH).
Preparation of carboxylic acid:
(i) From alcohols: Primary alcohols are readily oxidised to carboxylic acids with common
oxidising agents such as potassium permanganate (KMnO 4) in neutral, acidic or alkaline
media or by potassium dichromate (K 2Cr2O7) and chromium trioxide (CrO3) in acidic
media.

From alkyl benzenes: Aromatic carboxylic acids can be prepared by vigorous oxidation of
alkyl benzenes with chromic acid or acidic or alkaline potassium permanganate.

From Nitriles: Nitriles on hydrolysis in presence of dilute acids or bases forms amide
which on further hydrolysis gives carboxylic acid.

From Grignard reagent: Grignard reagents react with carbon dioxide (dry ice) to form
salts of carboxylic acids which on hydrolysis forms carboxylic acids.

118 | P a g e
From acyl halides and anhydrides: Acid chlorides when hydrolysed with water give
carboxylic acids. On basic hydrolysis carboxylate ions are formed which on further
acidification forms corresponding carboxylic acids. Anhydrides on hydrolysis forms
corresponding acid(s)From esters: Acidic hydrolysis of esters gives directly carboxylic acids
while basic hydrolysis gives carboxylates, which on acidification give corresponding
carboxylic acids.

Physical properties of carboxylic acids:

(i) Solubility: As the size of alky group increases solubility of carboxylic acid decreases
because non-polar part of the acid increases.
(ii) Boiling points: Carboxylic acids are higher boiling liquids than aldehydes, ketones and
even alcohols of comparable molecular masses. This is due to extensive association of
carboxylic acid molecules through intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
Acidity of carboxylic acids:
Carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenols. The strength of acid depends on extent of
ionization which in turn depends on stability of anion formed.
(i) Effect of electron donating substituents on the acidity of carboxylic acids: Electron
donating substituent decreases stability of carboxylate ion by intensifying the negative
charge and hence decreases acidity of carboxylic acids.
(ii) Effect of electron withdrawing substituent on the acidity of carboxylic acids: Electron
withdrawing group increases the stability of carboxylate ion by delocalizing negative
charge and hence, increases acidity of carboxylic acid. The effect of the following groups
in increasing acidity order is
Ph < I < Br < Cl < F < CN < NO2 < CF3

Reaction of carboxylic acids:

Reaction with Na metal NaOH, NaHCO3

Esterification: Carboxylic acids are esterified with alcohols in the presence of a mineral
acid such as concentrated H2SO4 or HCl gas as a catalyst.

119 | P a g e
(iii) Carboxylic acids react with PCl5, PCl3 and SOCl2 to form acyl chlorides.

Some Distinguishing tests:

1.
Methanal Ethanal
It does not give yellow ppt of It gives yellow ppt of iodoform with NaOH
iodoform with NaOH and I2 and I2
2 Benzaldehyde Acetophenone
*It gives silver mirror with Tollen’s *It does not gives silver mirror with Tollen's
reagent reagent
*It does not give yellow ppt of *It gives yellow ppt of iodoform with Iodine
iodoform with iodine and NaOH or and NaOH or NaOI
NaOI
3 Methanal Benzaldehyde
It gives brick red ppt with Fehling’s It does not give brick red ppt with Fehling’s
solution A & B solution A & B
4 Propanal Ethanal
It does not give yellow ppt of It gives yellow ppt of iodoform with NaOH
iodoform with NaOH and I2 and I2
5 Phenol Benzoic Acid
Does not give brisk effervescence Gives brisk effervescence with NaHCO3
with NaHCO3
6 Acetic acid Formic acid
It doesn't give silver mirror with It gives silver mirror with Tollen’s reagent
ammonical silver nitrate. (ammonical silver nitrate).
It doesn't give brick red ppt with It gives brick red ppt with Fehling’s solution
Fehling’s solution A & B A&B
7 Phenol Ethanol
Gives violet coloured solution with Does not give violet coloured solution with
neutral FeCl3 solution. neutral FeCl3 solution.
8 Propanol Ethanol
It does not give yellow ppt of It gives yellow ppt of iodoform with NaOH
iodoform with NaOH and I2 and I2
9 Benzophenone Acetophenone
It does not give yellow ppt of It gives yellow ppt of iodoform with NaOH
iodoform with NaOH and I2 and I2
10 Pentan-3-one Pentan-2-one
It does not give yellow ppt of It gives yellow ppt of iodoform with NaOH
iodoform with NaOH and I2 and I2

120 | P a g e
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)
1.) Which aldehyde will give Cannizzaro’s reaction?
(a) CH3CH2CH2CHO (b) CH3CH2CHCHO
(c) (CH3)3CCHO (d) (CH3)2CH2CH2CHO
2.) Carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenol and alcohol because of
(a) Formation of dimers (b) Resonance stabilization of their conjugate base
(c) Highly acidic hydrogen (d) Intermolecular hydrogen bonding
3.) Aldehydes and ketones undergo reactions.
a) electrophilic addition b) electrophilic substitution
c) nucleophilic addition d) nucleophilic substitution
4.) What is the correct order of reactivity of the following towards nucleophilic addition?
a) Methanal > Ethanal > Acetone b) Acetone > Ethanal > Methanal
c) Methanal > Acetone > Ethanal d) Ethanal > Methanal > Acetone
5.) Identify the reagent for the conversion of but-2-ene to ethanal.
a) O3/H2O-Zn dust b) H2O, H2SO4, HgSO4
c) PCC d) DIBAL-H
6.) Which of the reactions below can result in ketones?
a) Oxidation of primary alcohols
b) Oxidation of secondary alcohols
c) Dehydrogenation of tertiary alcohols
d) Dehydrogenation of primary alcohols
7.) Which of the following orders of relative strengths of acids is correct?
(a) ClCH2COOH > FCH2COOH > BrCH2COOH
(b) ClCH2COOH > BrCH2COOH > FCH2COOH
(c) BrCH2COOH > ClCH2COOH > FCH2COOH
(d) FCH2COOH > ClCH2COOH > BrCH2COOH
8.) The reagent which does not react with both Propanone and
Benzaldehyde:
(a) Grignard reagent (b) Tollen’s reagent
(c) Zn-Hg amalgam (d)Fehling solution
9.) Which of the following compound will not give NaHCO3 test?
(a)Carbolic acid (b)Formic acid (c) Acetic acid (d) Benzoic acid
10.) In Clemmensen Reduction carbonyl compound is treated with
(a) Zinc amalgam + HCl (b) Sodium amalgam + HCl
(c) Zinc amalgam + nitric acid (d) Sodium amalgam + HNO3

Question 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Answer c b c a a b b d c a

121 | P a g e
ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARKS)
Note : In the following questions a statement of assertion followed by a statement of
reason is given. Choose the correct answer out of the following choices.
a) Assertion and reason both are correct statements and reason is correct explanation
for assertion.
b) Assertion and reason both are correct statements but reason is not correct
explanation for assertion.
c) Assertion is correct statement but reason is wrong statement.
d) Assertion is wrong statement but reason is correct statement.
11.) Assertion: Methanal, ethanal and propanone are miscible with water
in all proportions.
Reason: The lower members of aldehydes and ketones form hydrogen
bond with water.
12.) Assertion: Aldehydes are generally more reactive than ketones in
nucleophilic addition reactions.
Reason: Sterically, the presence of two relatively large substituents in
ketones hinder the approach of nucleophile to carbonyl
carbon than in aldehydes having only one such substituent.
13.) Assertion: Sodium hydrogen sulphite adds to aldehydes and
ketones to form the addition product.
Reason: Reaction of aldehydes with Sodium hydrogen sulphite is
useful for separation and purification of aldehydes.
14.) Assertion: Pka of acetic acid is lower than that of phenol
Reason: Phenoxide ion is more resonance stabilized than acetate ion.
15.) Assertion : α-hydrogen atoms of carbonyl compounds are acidic in nature.
Reason: The strong electron donating effect of the carbonyl group
and resonance destabilisation of the conjugate base makes
the alpha hydrogen acidic.
Question 11 12 13 14 15
Answer a a b d c
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)
16) Write the structure of 3-oxopentanal.

Ans:
17) Give a chemical test to distinguish between Benzoic acid and Phenol.
Ans: Benzoic acid forms a brisk effervescence with NaHCO3 solution but
phenol does not respond to this test.
18) Formaldehyde does not undergo aldol condensation reaction. Why?
Ans: Formaldehyde does not contain α-hydrogen atom.
19) Aldehydes and Ketones have lower boiling points than corresponding alcohols. Why?
Ans: Aldehydes and ketones have weak intermolecular interactions dipole –
dipole interactions whereas alcohols have intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
20) Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their reactivity
in nucleophilic addition reactions:
(i) Ethanal, Propanal, Propanone, Butanone.
(ii) Benzaldehyde, p-Tolualdehyde, p-Nitrobenzaldehyde, Acetophenone.
Ans: (i)Butanone<Propanone<Propanal<Ethanal
(ii)Acetophenone < p-Tolualdehyde < Benzaldehyde < p-nitro benzaldehyde

122 | P a g e
21) Write the structure of the product formed in the following reaction.

Ans:

22) Carboxylic acids do not give characteristic reactions of carbonyl group. Why?
Ans: The carboxylic carbon is less electrophilic due to resonance than
the carbonyl carbon.
23) Write the reagents required in the following reactions.

Ans:

24) Why does benzoic acid not undergo Friedel-Craft reaction?

Ans: – COOH group in C6H5COOH is an electron withdrawing group which
deactivates the benzene ring. Hence electrophilic substitution
becomes difficult.
25) Why Pka of F-CH2COOH is lower than that of Cl–CH2COOH?
Ans: Stronger –I effect of fluorine makes F-CH2COOH to be stronger acid
than Cl–CH2COOH and has less Pka.
SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
26) Draw structures of the following derivatives:
(i) The 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone of benzaldehyde
(ii) Cyclopropanone oxime
Ans: (i)

(ii)

27) How will you convert

(i) Propanone to Propene (ii) Benzoic acid to Benzaldehyde
Ans:

123 | P a g e
 (ii)

28) Give the structure of the following compounds.

(i) 4-Nitropropiophenone
(ii) 2-Hydroxycyclopentanecarbaldehyde
Ans: (i) (ii)

29) Explain each of the following.

(i) Cyanohydrin (ii) Acetal
Ans: (i) Cyanohydrin: gem-Hydroxynitriles, i.e., compounds possessing hydroxyl and
cyano groups on the same carbon atom are called cyanohydrins. These are produced
by addition of HCN to aldehydes or ketones in a weakly basic medium.
(ii) gem – Di alkoxy compounds in which the two alkoxy groups are present on the
terminal carbon atom are called acetals. These are produced by the action of an
aldehyde with two equivalents of a monohydric alcohol in presence of dry HCl gas.
30) What happens when Formaldehyde is treated with conc.KOH?
Ans: It undergoes disproportionation to form Methanol and Potassium formate. This is
called Cannizzaro reaction.

SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3MARKS)

31. Give plausible explanation for each of the following:
(i) Cyclohexanone forms cyanohydrin in good yield but 2,2,6-trimethylcyclohexanone
does not.
(ii) There are two – NH2 groups in semicarbazide. However, only one is involved in the
formation of semicarbazones.
(iii) During the preparation of esters from a carboxylic acid and an alcohol in the presence
of an acid catalyst, the water or the ester should be removed as soon as it is formed.
Ans
(i) In 2,2,6-trimethylcyclohexanone due to the presence of three methyl groups nearer
to the C = O, the nucleophilic attack by the CN – ion does not occur due to steric
hinderance. Since there is no such steric hindrance in cyclohexanone, therefore,
nucleophilic attack by the CN– ion occurs readily and hence cyclohexanone
cyanohydrin is obtained in good yield.
(ii) Although semicarbazide has two – NH2 groups but one of them (i.e. which is directly
attached to C = O) is involved in resonance as shown above. As a result, electron
density on N of this -NH2 group decreases and hence it does not act as a nucleophile.
In contrast, the other -NH2 group (i.e. attached to NH) is not involved in resonance

124 | P a g e
 and hence lone pair of electrons present on N atom of this -NH2 group is available
for nucleophilic attack on the C = O group of aldehydes and ketones.
(iii) The formation of esters from a carboxylic acid and an alcohol in presence of an acid
catalyst is a reversible reaction. Thus, to shift the equilibrium in the forward
direction, the water or the ester formed should be removed as fast as it is formed.
32. Identify the compounds A, B and C in the following reaction.

Ans:

33. Give simple chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds.
(i) Propanal and Propanone (ii) Acetophenone and Benzophenone
(iii)Phenol and Benzoic acid
Ans: (i) Tollen’s test- Propanal on warming with ammoniacal silver nitrate
solution produces bright silver mirror. Propanone does not give this test.
(ii) Iodoform test-Acetophenone gives yellow ppt of iodoform on treating
with I2 and NaOH. Benzophenone does not give this test.
(iii) NaHCO3 test- Benzoic acid gives brisk effervescence when treated
with NaHCO3, Phenol does not give this test.
34. Write structures of compounds A, B and C in the following reactions:

Ans:
A-Ethanal, B- 3-hydroxybutanal, C-But-2-enal
35. Predict the products of the following reactions.

Ans:

125 | P a g e
 Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each):
36. Describe the following :
(i) Aldol Condensation (ii)Cannizzaro Reaction
(iii)Clemmensen Reduction (iv)Rosenmund Reduction
(v) Hell Volhard Zelinsky Reaction.
Ans: (i) Aldol Condensation-Aldehydes having α-hydrogen react with a dilute
base to give β-hydroxy aldehydes called aldols.

(ii) Cannizzaro reaction:

Aldehydes which do not contain hydrogen when treated with a concentrated
solution of an alkali undergo self oxidation-reduction. As a result, one molecule of
aldehyde is reduced to corresponding alcohol while the other molecule is oxidized
to the corresponding acid.

(iii) Clemmensen Reduction: Aldehydes or ketones are reduced to alkanes

using hydrochloric acid and zinc amalgam.

(iv) Rosenmund Reduction: Acyl chloride is hydrogenated in the presence of catalyst –

palladium on barium sulphate to produce aldehydes.

(v) Hell Volhard Zelinsky Reaction: It involves the halogenation of a carboxylic acid
having alpha hydrogen when treated with Red P and Cl2 or Br2.

37. An aromatic compound ‘A’ (Molecular formula C 8H8O) gives positive 2,4-DNP test. It
gives a yellow precipitate of compound ‘B’ on treatment with iodine and sodium hydroxide
solution. Compound ‘A’ does not give Tollen’s or Fehling’s test. On drastic oxidation
with potassium permanganate, it forms a carboxylic acid ‘C’ (Molecular formula
C7H6O2 ), which is also formed along with the yellow compound in the above reaction.
Identify A, B and C and write all the reactions involved.

Ans: A-Acetophenone B-Iodoform C- Benzoic acid

126 | P a g e
Case based; Source based Integrated Questions
38.) Read the following passage and answer the questions given below the passage.
Reductive alkylation is the term applied to the process of introducing alkyl groups into
ammonia or a primary or secondary amine by means of an aldehyde or ketone in the
presence of a reducing agent. The present discussion is limited to those reductive
alkylations in which the reducing agent is hydrogen and a catalyst or "nascent" hydrogen,
usually from a metal acid combination; most of these reductive alkylations have been
carried out with hydrogen and a catalyst. The principal variation excluded is that in which
the reducing agent is formic acid or one of its derivatives; this modification is known as
the Leuckart reaction. The process of reductive alkylation of ammonia consists in the
addition of ammonia to a carbonyl compound and reduction of the addition compound or
its dehydration product. The reaction usually is carried out in ethanol solution when the
reduction is to be affected catalytically Since the primary amine is formed in the presence
of the aldehyde it may react in the same way as ammonia, yielding an addition compound,
a Schiff's base (RCH= NCH2R) and finally, a secondary amine. Similarly, the primary amine
may react with the imine, forming an addition product which also is reduced to a
secondary amine Finally, the secondary amine may react with either the aldehyde or the
imine to give products which are reduced to tertiary amines. Similar reactions may occur
when the carbonyl compound employed is a ketone
A] Write equations for the following reactions.
(i) Acetone with hydroxyl amine (ii) Ethanal with ammonia
Ans (i)Acetone with hydroxyl amine

(ii) Ethanal with ammonia

B] A compound gives 2,4 DNP test, further it reduces Tollen’s reagent. what conclusions
can be drawn from this information?
Ans: As the compound gives 2,4-DNP test.it must be an aldehyde or ketone. Further as it
gives Tollen’s test it is an aldehyde.
C] What type of reaction takes place when aldehydes or ketones are treated with ammonia
and its derivatives?
Ans: Nucleophilic addition reaction.

127 | P a g e
39.) Read the following passage and answer the questions given below the
passage.
The addition reaction of enol or enolate to the carbonyl functional group of aldehyde or
ketone is known as aldol addition. The b-hydroxy aldehyde or b-hydroxyketone so
obtained undergo dehydration in second step to produce a conjugated enone. The first
part of reaction is an addition reaction and the second part is an elimination reaction.
Carbonyl compound having alpha-hydrogen undergoes aldol condensation reaction . When
an aldehyde with no alpha-hydrogen reacts with concentrated aqueous NaOH, half the
aldehyde is converted to carboxylic acid salt and other half is converted to an alcohol. In
other words, half of the reactant is oxidized and another half is reduced. This reaction is
known as Cannizzaro reaction.
A] How will you convert ethanol to But-2-enal?
Ans:

B] Name the products of aldol condensation of Propanone and Ethanal.

Ans: 1) But-2-enal 2)2-Methylpent-2-enal
3)Pent-2-enal 4) 2-methyl but -2-enal
C] What happens when Benzaldehyde is treated with Conc. NaOH?

40.) Read the following passage and answer the questions given below the passage.
The carbonyl group of aldehydes and ketones is reduced to -CH2- group on treatment with
zinc amalgam and concentrated hydrochloric acid [Clemmensen reduction] or with
hydrazine followed by heating with sodium or potassium hydroxide in high boiling solvent
such as ethylene glycol (Wolf-Kishner reduction). Aldehydes differ from ketones in their
oxidation reactions. Aldehydes are easily oxidised to carboxylic acids on treatment with
common oxidising agents like nitric acid, potassium permanganate, potassium
dichromate, etc. Even mild oxidising agents, mainly Tollens’ reagent and Fehling’s reagent
also oxidise aldehydes. Ketones are generally oxidised under vigorous conditions, i.e.,
strong oxidising agents and at elevated temperatures. Their oxidation involves carbon-
carbon bond cleavage to afford a mixture of carboxylic acids having lesser number of
carbon atoms than the parent ketone.
A] Write a chemical equation to convert Propanone to propane. Mention the name of the
reaction.

Ans: and Wolff –Kishner reduction

B]Name the reagents used in the following conversions?
i) Butan-1-ol to Butanal ii) Ethanal to Ethanoic acid
Ans: i) PCC / CrO3-H2SO4 ii) Acidified KMnO4/K2Cr2O7
C] You are given two test tubes. One contains aliphatic aldehyde and the other one
contains aromatic aldehyde. How will you identify the test tube containing aromatic
aldehyde?

128 | P a g e
Ans: Both the given compounds are subjected to Fehling’s test. The
compound which does not give Fehling’s test is an aromatic aldehyde

41.) Read the following passage and answer the questions given below the passage.
Aldehydes and ketones are the simplest and most important carbonyl compounds. In
aldehydes, the carbonyl group is bonded to a carbon and hydrogen while in the ketones,
it is bonded to two carbon atoms. The IUPAC names of open chain aliphatic aldehydes and
ketones are derived from the names of the corresponding alkanes by replacing the ending
–e with –al and –one respectively. In case of aldehydes the longest carbon chain is
numbered starting from the carbon of the aldehyde group while in case of ketones the
numbering begins from the end nearer to the carbonyl group. The substituents are
prefixed in alphabetical order along with numerals indicating their positions in the carbon
chain. The same applies to cyclic ketones, where the carbonyl carbon is numbered one.
When the aldehyde group is attached to a ring, the suffix carbaldehyde is added after the
full name of the cycloalkane. The numbering of the ring carbon atoms starts from the
carbon atom attached to the aldehyde group. The name of the simplest aromatic aldehyde
carrying the aldehyde group on a benzene ring is benzene carbaldehyde. However, the
common name benzaldehyde is also accepted by IUPAC. Other aromatic aldehydes are
hence named as substituted benzaldehydes.
A] Write the structures of 4-Fluoroacetophenone & 2-Hydroxybutanal.
Ans:i) ii)

B] Write the IUPAC names of the following ketones and aldehydes.

i) CH3CH=CHCHO ii) CH3CH2COCH(C2H5)CH2CH2Cl
Ans: i) But-2-en-1-al or But-2-enal ii) 6-Chloro-4-ethylhexan-3-one
C] Name the compound represented by the formula

Ans: 2- methylcyclopentane carbaldehyde

42.) Read the following passage and answer the questions given below the passage.
Effect of substituents on the acidity of carboxylic acids: Substituents may affect the
stability of the conjugate base and thus, also affect the acidity of the carboxylic acids.
Electron withdrawing groups increase the acidity of carboxylic acids by stabilising the
conjugate base through delocalisation of the negative charge by inductive and/or
resonance effects. Conversely, electron donating groups decrease the acidity by
destabilising the conjugate base.

129 | P a g e
A] Which is more acid Acrylic acid CH2=CHCOOH or Propanoic acid ? Why?
Ans: Acrylic acid is more acidic than Propanoic acid. In case of acrylic acid, the carbon
atom of the carboxylic group (-COOH) is attached with SP2hybridised carbon atom which
has more s- character (33%) than SP3hybridised carbon atom (25%), hence SP 2 hybridised
carbon atom become more electronegative so the electron density shifts towards SP2
carbon atom, then due to inductive effect oxygen acquires positive charge hence it becomes
easier to remove H+ ion.
B] Dichloroacetic acid is stronger acid than chloroacetic acid. Why?
Ans: The more the number of electron withdrawing groups the more is the acidic nature.
C] Arrange the following acids in the increasing order of acidic strength
Benzoic acid, 4- nitrobenzoic acid, 3,4-dinitro benzoic acid,4- methoxy benzoic acid
Ans: 4- methoxy benzoic acid<benzoic acid<4-nitrobenzoic acid<3,4- dinitrobenzoic acid.

130 | P a g e
131 | P a g e
 9. AMINES
Quick Revision Points:
Amines are alkyl / aryl derivatives of ammonia. In amines nitrogen atom is sp3
hybridised and contains one lone pair.
Primary amine (10) Secondary amine (20) Tertiary amine (30)
One- H atom is replaced by Two-H atom is replaced Three-H atom is
R/Ar. by R/Ar. replaced by R/Ar.

IUPAC Name: -
Aliphatic amine:
Alkanamines
Aromatic amine:
Benzenamine/Aniline
CH3-NH2 CH3-NH- CH3 (CH3)3N
Methanamine N-Methylmethanamine N, N-
CH3-CH- CH3 dimethylmethanamine
NH2
Propan-2-amine
CH3-NH- CH2- CH3
N-Methylethanamine
CH3 - CH2-NH- CH2- CH3
N-Ethylethanamine
Aniline/benzenamine N, N-
Dimethylbenzenamine
Preparation of Amines:
Reduction of Nitro Compounds gives aliphatic
and aromatic primary amines. (Reducing
Agents): -
• Hydrogen and nickel/ palladium or
platinum.
• Iron scrap and hydrochloric acid (Fe + HCl).
• Tin and hydrochloric acid (Sn + HCl).
Ammonolysis of alkyl halides: - NH3 RX RX RX
RX → RNH2 → R2NH → R3N → R4 N+X−
Reagent: Ethanolic solution of ammonia. −HX
Disadvantage: Mixture of amines formed.
H2/Ni or Na(Hg)/C2H5OH
Reduction of nitriles Reducing agents: - R − CN →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ R − CH2NH2
LiAlH4/Catalytic hydrogenation.
LiAll4
Reduction of Amides: CH CONH → CH CH NH
3 2 H O 3 2 2
2
Hoffmann bromamide degradation Reaction: An amide is heated with Bromine in
aq. solution of NaOH/KOH gives primary amine.
R − CONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH → R − NH2 + Na2CO3 + 2NaBr + 2H2O
The amine formed contains one carbon less than that present in the amide.
Gabriel Phthalimide Synthesis: Only aliphatic
primary amines are prepared by this method.
Aromatic primary amines cannot be prepared
because aryl halides do not undergo
nucleophilic substitution with the anion
formed by phthalimide.

132 | P a g e
Physical properties Chemical reaction and Basic Nature
In Tertiary amines H-Bonding is
not possible due to absence of H
atoms.
Hydrogen bonding 30 <20<10
Solubility in water 30 <20<10
Boiling Point 30 <20<10
Boiling point
Alkane < Amine < Alcohol

• Aliphatic amines are stronger base than ammonia due to +I effect of alkyl groups.
• Aromatic amines are weaker bases than ammonia due to the electron withdrawing
nature of the aryl group.
Acetylation: (replacement of H-atom of (C2H5)2NH + CH3COCl → CH3CON(C2H5)2 +
–NH2 />N–H group by the acyl group). HCl
Reacting agent: stronger base.
Benzoylation: (replacement of H-atom
of –NH2 />N–H group by the benzoyl CH3NH2 + C6H5COCl →C6H5 CONH-CH3 + HCl
group).
HEAT
Carbylamine reaction (Isocyanide RNH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH →⎯⎯→ RNC + 3KCl + 3H2O
Test) Secondary and tertiary amines do not show
Primary amines react with chloroform this reaction.
and KOH give isocyanides It is used as a test for primary amines.
(Carbylamine) which has unpleasant
smell (foul smell).
NaNO2+HCl H2O
Reaction with nitrous acid (HNO2) RNH2+HNO2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ [RN2+Cl−] →⎯→ ROH + N2 + HCl
Primary aliphatic amines react with
nitrous acid to form aliphatic
diazonium salts (unstable) which 278K
C6H5NH2 + HNO2 →⎯⎯→ C6H5N+Cl− + NaCl + 2H2O
liberate nitrogen gas and alcohols. 2
Aromatic amines at low temperatures
(273-278 K) forms diazonium salts.

133 | P a g e
Reaction with Benzenesulphonyl chloride (Hinsberg's test)(C6H5SO2Cl)
Primary Amine Secondary Amine Tertiary Amine
Primary amines form Secondary amines form Tertiary amines do
N-alkylbenzene sulphonamide N, N- not react with
which is soluble in alkali due dialkylbenzenesulphonamide Hinsberg’s reagent.
to presence of acidic hydrogen which is not soluble in alkali
at N-atom. due to absence of hydrogen
atom at N-atom.

Electrophilic substitution:
–NH2 group is ortho and para directing and a powerful activating group.

In direct Nitration meta product is formed due to formation of anilinium ion which is
meta directing.

Electrophilic substitution:
Aniline is converted into acetanilide by acetylation with acetic anhydride and then the
desired substitution is carried out followed by hydrolysis the lone pair on nitrogen is less
available for donation to benzene ring by resonance. Therefore, activating effect of -
NHCOCH3 group is less than that of amino group.

134 | P a g e
Benzene Diazonium Chloride Preparation and Reactions:

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)

Q: 1 The correct IUPAC name for CH3 – CH2- CH2- N(CH3) -C2H5 is
(a) N, N- diethyl propan-1-amine (c) N, N-dimethyl propan-1-amine
(b) N-Ethyl –N-methyl propan-1-amine (d) N-methyl 1- pentanamine
Q: 2 Which of the following statement is not correct?
(a) Primary amines show intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
(b) Secondary amines show intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
(c) Tertiary amines show intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
(d) Amines have lower boiling points as compared to those of alcohols and carboxylic
acids of comparable molar masses.
Q: 3 Which of the following statement is correct?
(a) The pKb of ammonia is more than that of methanamine.
(b) The Kb of ammonia is more than that of methanamine
(c) The pKb of ammonia is more than that of aniline.
(d) The pKb of ammonia is less than that of methanamine.
Q: 4 Atharv heated a mixture of primary amine and chloroform with ethanolic
potassium hydroxide (KOH) to form isocyanides which has foul smelling. What
is the name of the reaction involved in the statement?
(a) Hoffmann bromide degradation reaction (c) Gabriel Phthalimide reaction
(b) Hinsberg’s Test (d) Carbylamine reaction
Q: 5 The correct increasing order of basic strength for the following compounds is:

(a) II < III < I (c) III < II < I

(b) III < I < II (d) II < I < II
𝐂𝐮,𝐇𝐂𝐥
Q: 6 The reaction 𝐂�Ô 𝐇𝟓 𝐍𝟐 𝐂𝐥 →⎯⎯⎯→ 𝐂�Ô𝐇𝟓 𝐂𝐥 + is named as
𝐍𝟐
(a) Sandmeyer reaction (b) Gattermann reaction
(c) Claisen reaction (d)Carbylamine reaction

135 | P a g e
136 | P a g e
Q: 7 The -NH2 group is o-, p- directing and strongly activates the aromatic ring.
Therefore, aromatic amines undergo electrophilic substitution reactions readily
and it is difficult to stop the reaction at the monosubstitution stage. However,
sometimes monosubstitution product is required. How can the activating effect
of -NH2 group be controlled to get monosubstitution product?
(a) Protecting -NH2 group by chlorination with chlorine
(b) Protecting -NH2 group by nitration with nitric acid
(c) Protecting -NH2 group by alkylation with alkyl chloride
(d) Protecting -NH2 group by acetylation with acetic anhydride
Q: 8 A and B in the folowing reactions are:

(a) A = Nitrobenzene, B = Nitrobenzene (c) A=Nitrobenzene,B = Nitrotoluene

(b) A = Nitrobenzene, B = benzamide (d) A = benzamide, B = Nitrobenzene
Q: 9 Gabriel phthalimide reaction is used for the preparation of:
(a) Primary aromatic amine (c) Secondary amine
(b) Primary aliphatic amine (d)Tertiary amine
Q: 10 Hinsberg's reagent is:
(a) Phenylisocyanide (c) benzensulphonyl chloride
(b) p- toluenesulphonic acid (d) o-dichlorobenzene
Question 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Answer B C A D C B D B C C
ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARKS)
In the Following questions a statement of Assertion(A) is followed by a statement of
Reason(R). Select the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
c. A is true but R is false.
d. A is false but R is true.
The question given below consist of an assertion and a reason. Use the following key to
choose.
11. Assertion(A): Primary aromatic amines cannot be prepared by Gabriel phthalimide
synthesis.
Reason(R): Aryl halides undergo nucleophilic substitution with anion formed by
phthalimide.
12. Assertion(A): Among isomeric amines, 30 amines have lowest boiling point.
Reason(R): Tertiary amines do not have intermolecular association due to absence of
H- atoms linked to nitrogen.
13. Assertion(A): Aliphatic amines are stronger bases than ammonia.
Reason(R): Aromatic amines are weaker bases than ammonia.
14. Assertion(A): Very high amount of HCl is required in reduction of nitro compounds
with iron scrap
Reason(R): FeCl2 formed gets hydrolysed to release HCl during the reaction.
15. Assertion(A): Aniline reacts with bromine water to give 2,4,6-tribromoaniline.
Reason(R): The -NH2 group is o-, p- directing and strongly activates the aromatic
ring.

Question 1 2 3 4 5
Answer c a b d a

137 | P a g e
VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (2 MARKS)
Q: 16 Give the IUPAC name of (i) H2N – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2
(ii) CH3—NH—CH2CH3.
Answer: (i) But-3-en-1-amine (ii) N-methylethanamine
Q: 17 Which of the following are tertiary amines

Answer: (iii) and (iv) are tertiary amines

Q: 18 Name the IUPAC names of following.
(i) The amine produced by the Hoffmann bromamide degradation of propanamide.
(ii) The product produced after acylation of aniline.
Answer: (i) Ethanamine (CH3 – CH2 – NH2)
(ii) N-Phenyl ethanamide (CH3CONH- C6H5)
Q: 19 Write the main products of the following reactions:
PH=9−10
(𝑖) C6H5N+2Cl− + C6H5OH →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→
(ii) C6H5N+2Cl− + H3PO2 + H2O →
Answer: (i) C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
(ii) C6H5N=NC6H4OH
Q: 20 Write the chemical equations involved when aniline is treated with the
following reagents:
(i) Br2 water (ii) CHCl3 + KOH
Answer:

Q:21 How will you convert the following:

(i) Ethanoic acid to methanamine (ii) Benzene diazonium chloride to phenol
Answer:
(i) Ethanoic acid to methanamine
NH3 Br2/KOH
CH3COOH CH 3 CONH 2 CH3 NH2
∆ Hoffmann bromide degradation
(ii) Benzene diazonium chloride to phenol
C6H5N+2Cl− + H2O → C6H5OH + N2 + HCl
Q: 22 Give the chemical tests to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds:
(i)Ethylamine and Aniline (ii)Aniline and Benzylamine
Answer:
Ethylamine and aniline: Azo-dye test
(i) Aniline reacts with C6H5N+ 2 Cl , forms a yellow dye. Ethylamine does not form dye.
−

(ii) Aniline reacts with C6H5N 2Cl−, forms a yellow dye. Benzylamine does not form dye.
+

Q: 23 Write the reactions involved in the following:

(i) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis (ii) Sandmeyer reaction
Answer: (i)

(ii) C6H5N+2X− + CuCl/HCl → C6H5Cl + N2

138 | P a g e
Q: 24 How will you bring about the following conversions?
(a) Ethanamine into methanamine (b) Aniline into 4-bromoaniline
Answer:
(i) HNO2 CrO3,H2SO4 NH3,∆ Br2,KOH
CH3CH2NH2 →⎯⎯→ CH3CH2OH →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ CH3COOH →⎯⎯→ CH3 CONH2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯→ CH3NH2
(ii)

Q: 25 (i) Arrange the following in increasing order of pKb values:

C6H5CH2NH2, C6H5NHCH3, C6H5NH2
(ii) Arrange the following in decreasing order of solubility in water:
(C2H5)2NH, C2H5NH2, C6H5NH2
Answer: (i) C6H5CH2NH2 < C6H5NHCH3 < C6H5NH2
(ii) C2H5NH2 > (C2H5)2NH > C6H5NH2
SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (3 MARKS)
Q:26 How will you convert the following?
(i) Aniline to chlorobenzene
(ii) Methyl chloride to ethylamine
(iii) Nitrobenzene to benzoic acid
Answer:
(i) NaNO2+HCl + − Cu2Cl2/HCl
C6H5 − NH2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5N2 Cl →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5Cl
(ii) alc.KCN LiAlH4
CH3Cl →⎯⎯⎯⎯→ CH3CN →⎯⎯⎯→ CH3CH2NH2
(iii)

Q: 27 Mr. Krishna, a chemistry teacher gave his class students a sample of an amine
“P” having molecular formula C4H11N to test, identify and write the reaction. The
students observed that it reacts with Hinsberg’s reagent to form an alkali soluble
product. A student Ranu wrote the reaction as follows.

Identify the mistakes committed by Ranu. Write the type of amine in sample “P” and
correct chemical equation.
Answer: The formula of Hinsberg’s reagent and sample of P were written by Ranu are
incorrect. The Sample “P” belongs to primary amine. Therefore, sample “P” is
Butanamine. The correct chemical equation is as follows:

Q: 28 Account for the following:

(i) Aniline does not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction.
(ii) Diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic
amines
(iii) pKb of methylamine is less than that of aniline.

139 | P a g e
Answer: (i) Aniline being a Lewis base, reacts with Lewis acid AlCl3 to form a salt. Due
to this N atom of aniline acquires positive charge and hence acts as a strong
deactivating group for further reaction.
(ii) The diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic
amines due to dispersal of the positive charge on the benzene ring.
(iii) In aniline due to resonance the lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom are
delocalized over the benzene ring. As a result, the electron density on the nitrogen
decreases. On the other hand, in methyl amine +I effect of CH 3 increases the electron
density on the nitrogen atom. Therefore, aniline is a weaker base than methyl amine
and hence its pKb value is higher than that of methyl amine
Q: 29 Arrange the following:
(i) CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, NH3, (CH3)3N [basic strength in gaseous phase]
(ii) C2H5NH2, C6H5NH2, NH3, C6H5CH2NH2 and (C2H5)2NH [basic strength]
(iii) C6H5NH2, C6H5N(CH3)2, (C2H5)2NH and CH3NH2 [basic strength]
Answer: (i) (CH3)3N > (CH3)2NH >CH3NH2 > NH3
(ii) C6H5NH2 < NH3 < C6H5CH2NH2 < C2H5NH2 < (C2H5)2NH
(iii) C6H5NH2 < C6H5N(CH3)2 < CH3NH2 < (C2H5)2NH
Q: 30 Complete the following reactions:
(i) CH3CONH2 + Br2 + NaOH→ ............. + Na2CO3 + H2O
�C�Q
(ii) ………. + H2 →⎯⎯→ CH3-CH2-NH2
(iii) CH CONH (i) LiAlH4(ii)H2O
3 2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→
Answer:
(i) CH3CONH2 + Br2 + 4NaOH → CH3NH2. + Na2CO3 + 2H2O + 2NaBr
�C�Q
(ii) CH3-CH2-NO2 + H2 →⎯⎯→ CH3-CH2-NH2
(i) LiAlH4(ii)H2O
(iii) CH3 CONH 2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ CH3 CH2NH2
LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS (5 MARKS
Q: 31 in the following reaction chart identify A, B, C, D and E. Write their IUPAC name
and rewrite the following reaction

Answer: A = cyclohexane carboxamide B= Chloroform

C = cyclohexylcarbylamine D= N- methylcyclohexylamine E = Chloromethane

Q: 32 (i) An amine “X” with formula C3H9N reacts with benzenesulphonyl chloride to
give a precipitate which is insoluble in alkali. Give the structure and IUPAC name of
amine “X”. Write the chemical reaction
(ii) How will bring out the following conversions: (A) Aniline to Phenol (B) Aniline to
Iodobenzene.

140 | P a g e
Answer: (i) N methyl ethanamine (C2H5 NH CH3)

(ii) (a) 273−278K + −

C6H5 − NH2 + HNO2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5 − N2 Cl + NaCl + 2H2O
∆
C6H5N+2Cl− + H2O → C6H5OH + N2 + HCl
(b) 273−278K + −
C6H5 − NH2 + HNO2 →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5 − N2 Cl + NaCl + 2H2O
C6H5N+2Cl− + KI → C6H5 I + N2 + KCl
CASE BASED QUESTIONS
Q 33.Amines are organic bases having the general formula RR’2N, where R is a
hydrocarbon group, ‘R’ may be H or a hydrocarbon group. As with ammonia, the
reaction of amines with water is
RNH2 + H2O →RNH3+ +OH- .
Like all bases, amines form salts when allowed to react with acids.
CH3NH2 + HCl → CH3N+H3Cl
These salts are usually colourless, odourless solids.
Aromatic amines are used mainly in the manufacture of dyes.
Aniline, the simplest aromatic amine itself is a toxic compound; a number of other
aromatic amines such as 2-naphthylamine and benzidine are potent carcinogens.

Aniline 2- naphthylamine Benzidine

Q(i) Arrange the following in the increasing order of Pkb value

C6H5NH2, C2H5NH2, CH3NH2, NH3 .
(ii) Draw the structure of sulphanilic acid
(iii) In cold conditions, aniline is diazotised to form a compound, which is treated with
phenol to form a coloured product. Write the necessary equations.
OR
Give reasons
(a) Aniline on nitration gives considerable amount of meta product along with ortho
and para.
(b) Aniline is less basic than ammonia.
Answers (i) C2H5NH2, CH3NH2, NH3, C6H5NH2.
(ii)

(iii)

141 | P a g e
 OR

(a) Aniline being basic, reacts with acid to form anilinium ion, which is meta
directing.
(b) The lone pair of electrons on N in aniline are not readily available due to
delocalization with the benzene ring.

142 | P a g e
143 | P a g e
 10. BIOMOLECULES
Quick Revision Points

KEY POINTS EXPLANATIONS

Monosaccharides Cannot be hydrolysed further. eg- glucose, fructose, ribose
Disaccharides Sucrose (α-D- glucose + β-D-fructose), Maltose(α-D- glucose + α-
D- glucose)
Lactose (β-D-galactose + β-D-glucose)
Polysaccharides Starch (two components—Amylose and Amylopectin) polymer of
α-D- glucose
Amylose Water soluble,15-20% of starch, unbranched chain , C1– C4
glycosidic linkage.
Amylopectin Water insoluble, 80-85% of starch, branched chain polymer,
C1–C4 & C1–C6 glycosidic linkage
Cellulose Straight chain polysaccharide of β -D-glucose units/ joined by
C1-C4glycosidic linkage (β-link), not digestible by human /
constituent of cell wall of plant cells
Glycogen Highly branched polymer of α-D- glucose .found in liver, muscles
and brain.
reducing sugars Aldehydic/ ketonic groups free so reduce Fehling’s/ Tollens
solution and. Eg- maltose and lactose
Non reducing Aldehydic/ ketonic groups are bonded so cannot reduce Fehling’s
sugars solution and Tollens’ reagent. Eg- Sucrose
Anomers. The two cyclic hemiacetal forms of glucose differ only in the
configuration of the hydroxyl group at C1, called anomeric carbon
Such isomers, i.e., α –form and β -form, are called anomers.
Invert sugar Sucrose is dextrorotatory but after hydrolysis gives dextrorotatory
glucose and laevorotatory fructose. Since the laevorotation of
fructose (–92.4°) is more than dextrorotation of glucose (+ 52.5°),
the mixture is laevorotatory. Thus, hydrolysis of sucrose brings
about a change in the sign of rotation, from dextro (+) to laevo (–)
and the product is named as invert sugar
Glycosidic linkage Linkage between two mono saccharide
Importance of Major portion of our food. / used as storage molecules as starch
Carbohydrates in plants and glycogen in animals/.
Cell wall of bacteria and plants is made up of cellulose./wood and
cloth are cellulose /
provide raw materials for many important industries like textiles,
paper, lacquers and breweries.
essential amino which cannot be synthesised in the body and must be obtained
acids through diet, eg- Valine, Leucine
Nonessential amino which can be synthesised in the body, eg - Glycine, Alanine
acids
Zwitter ion. In aqueous solution, amino acids exist as a dipolar ion known as
Zwitter ion.
peptide linkage peptide linkage is an amide formed between –COOH group and –
NH2 group of two successive amino acids in peptide chain.
10- str. of proteins: sequence of amino acids that is said to be the primary structure
of protein

144 | P a g e
20- str. of proteins: secondary structure of protein refers to the shape in which a long
polypeptide chain can exist.
They are found to exist in two types of structures viz. α -helix and
β -pleated sheet structure.
Tertiary structure further folding of the secondary structure. It gives rise to two
of proteins: major molecular shapes viz. fibrous and globular.
Fibrous proteins Polypeptide chains run parallel, held together by hydrogen and
disulphide bonds, fibre– like structure. Water insoluble. Eg- are
keratin(in hair, wool, silk) and myosin (present in muscles).
Globular proteins chains of polypeptides coil around to give a spherical shape. water
soluble. Eg-Insulin and albumins

Stab. Forces 2°& 3° hydrogen bonds, disulphide linkages, van der Waals and
electrostatic forces of attraction.
Denaturation of When a protein is subjected to physical change like change in
Proteins temperature or chemical change like change in pH, the hydrogen
bonds are disturbed. Due to this, globules unfold and helix get
uncoiled and protein loses its biological activity. This is called
denaturation of protein.
(During denaturation 2° and 3° structures are destroyed but 1º
structure remains intact.)
eg- The coagulation of egg white on boiling, curdling of milk
Enzymes Enzymes are essential biological catalysts which are required to
catalyse biological reactions, e.g., maltose, lactose, invertase, etc.
Almost all the enzymes are globular proteins
Fat soluble vit These are vitamins A, D, E and K. They are stored in liver and
adipose
(fat storing) tissues
Water soluble vit B, C. these vitamins must be supplied regularly in diet because
they are readily excreted in urine
Vitamins –sources- Vit- A (Fish liver oil, carrots)- Night blindness/Vitamin B1 (Yeast,
Deficiency diseases milk,)- Beri beri
Vit-B2 (Milk, egg white)- Cheilosis/Vit- B6 (Yeast, milk,)-
Convulsions /
Vit- B12 (Meat, fish,)- Pernicious anaemia
Vit C(Citrus fruits)- Scurvy, /Vit D(Exposure to sunlight, fish and
egg yolk)- Rickets, osteomalacia

Vit E(wheat oil, sunflower oil)- fragility of RBCs/Vit K(leafy

vegetables)- Increased blood clotting time
DNA pentose sugar (D-2-deoxyribose) +phosphoric acid +nitrogenous
bases ( A, G, C, T )
RNA pentose sugar (ribose) + phosphoric acid + nitrogenous bases
(A, G, C, U )
Nucleoside / tides Nucleoside → sugar + base Nucleotides → sugar + base +
phosphate
Phosphodiester link Linkage between two nucleotides in polynucleotides

Functions of DNA reserve genetic information, maintain the identity of different

Nucleic Acids species e is capable of self duplication during cell division,
synthesizes protein in the cell.

145 | P a g e
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (1 MARKS)
1. α−D (+)-glucose and β−D (+)-glucose are-
(A) Anomers (B) Epimers (C) Enantiomers (D) Geometrical isomers
2. Which of the following statements about maltose is incorrect?
(A) It consists of two glucopyranose units
(B) It is a disaccharide
(C) Glycosidic bond between C1 of one unit and C4 of the other unit
(D) It is a non-reducing sugar
3. Which of the following acids is a vitamin?
(A) Aspartic acid (B) Ascorbic acid (C) Adipic acid (D) Saccharic acid
4. Which of the following statements is not true about glucose?
(A) It is an aldohexose (B) On heating with HI it forms n-hexane
(C) It is present in Pyranose form (D) It does not give 2,4-DNP test
5. The helical structure of protein is stabilized by:
(A) Peptide bond (B) Dipeptide bond (C) Hydrogen bonds (D) Vander Waal’s forces
6. The symbols D and L in the name of Carbohydrate represents
(A) Dextro rotatory nature
(B) Laevo rotatory nature
(C) The relative configuration of a particular isomer
(D) The optical activity of compounds
7. DNA and RNA compose of similar-
(A) Sugar (B) Purines bases (C) Pyrimidines bases (D) Both (A) and (B)
8. Which of the following is/are example(s) of denaturation of protein?
(A) Coagulation of egg white (B) Curding of milk
(C) Clotting of blood (D) Both (A) and (B)
9. What are the hydrolysis products of lactose?
(A) β–D-galactose and β –D-Glucose (B) α –D-Galactose and α –D-Glucose
(C) α –D-Glucose and β –D-Fructose (D) None of these
10. Dinucleotide is obtained by joining two nucleotides together by
phosphodiester linkage. Between which carbon atoms of pentose sugars of
nucleotides are these linkages present?
(A) 5’ and 3’ (B) 1’ and 5’ (C) 5’ and 5’ (D) 3’ and 3’

ANSWERS
1. A 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. C 6. C 7. B 8. D 9. A 10.A
ASSERTION REASON TYPE QUESTIONS(1MARKS)
1. Two statements are given below- one labelled Assertion (A) and the other
labelled Reason (R).
ASSERTION – Vitamin C can’t be stored in our body.
REASON – Vitamin C is water soluble and is excreted from the body through urine.
(a) A and R both statements are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A and R both statements are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct statement but R is not the correct statement.
(d) A is incorrect statement but R is the correct statement.
2. Two statements are given below- one labelled Assertion (A) and the other
labelled Reason (R).
ASSERTION – Proteins are polymers of alpha amino acids connected by peptide
bonds.
REASON – A tripeptide contains 3 amino acids linked by 3 peptide bonds.
(a) A and R both statements are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A and R both statements are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct statement but R is not the correct statement.
(d) A is incorrect statement but R is the correct statement.

146 | P a g e
 3. Two statements are given below- one labelled Assertion (A) and the other
labelled Reason (R).
ASSERTION – Change in pH and heating leads to denaturation of proteins.
REASON – Change in pH and heating cause loss of biological activity of proteins.
(a) A and R both statements are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A and R both statements are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct statement but R is not the correct statement.
(d) A is incorrect statement but R is the correct statement.
4. Two statements are given below- one labelled Assertion (A) and the other
labelled Reason (R).
ASSERTION – Adenine and Guanine are the purines present in both nucleic acids.
REASON – Thiamine and Uracil are the pyrimidine present in DNA.
(a) A and R both statements are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A and R both statements are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct statement but R is not the correct statement.
(d) A is incorrect statement but R is the correct statement.
5. Two statements are given below- one labelled Assertion (A) and the other
labelled Reason (R).
ASSERTION – Amylopectin is water soluble and contributes 15-20% of starch.
REASON – Amylopectin has C1-C4 & C1-C6 glycosidic linkages.
(a) A and R both statements are correct and R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) A and R both statements are correct and R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is correct statement but R is not the correct statement.
(d) A is incorrect statement but R is the correct statement.
ANSWERS
1.A 2.B 3.A 4.C 5.D
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (1M)
1. What is the basic structural difference between glucose and fructose?
A. Glucose has aldehyde group whereas fructose has keto group.
2. Name the carbohydrate used as storage molecule to store energy in animals?
A. Glycogen
3. Name the vitamin whose deficiency cause pernicious anemia?
A. Vit B12
4. Write down the vitamin which is responsible for the coagulation of blood?
A. Vit K
5. Give one example each for Fibrous protein and Globular protein.
A. Fibrous protein – Keratin, Globular protein – Insulin
6. What type of linkage is responsible for the formation of proteins?
A. Peptide linkage.
7. Name the unit formed by the attachment of a base to 11 positions of sugar.
A. Nucleoside
8. Write the products obtained after hydrolysis of DNA.
A. Pentose sugar, phosphoric acid and Nitrogen containing heterocyclic compounds as
bases.
9. Name the base that is found in nucleotide of RNA only ?
A. Uracil
10. Name
a) A major sex hormone produced in males b) The main female sex hormone
A. a) Testosterone
b) Estradiol

147 | P a g e
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS TYPE – 1 ( 2M)
1. What is the difference between nucleotide and nucleoside?
A. Nucleoside contains ribose or deoxyribose sugar and heterocyclic base. Nucleotide
contains phosphoric acid residue along with heterocyclic base and pentose sugar.
2. Name a water-soluble vitamin which is a powerful antioxidant? Give one of its
sources.
A. Vit C, citrus fruits like orange, lemon etc.
3. Write 2 differences between RNA and DNA.
A. RNA – a) It has ribose sugar with adenine, uracil, cytosine, guanine as heterocyclic
bases.
b) It is single helix.
DNA – a) It has deoxyribose sugar along with adenine, thiamine, cytosine, guanine as
heterocyclic bases.
b) It is double helix.
4. What are the two types of secondary structure of proteins? How will you
differentiate between them?
A. Alpha – helix and Beta pleated helix structure.
Those polypeptide chains stabilized by intramolecular hydrogen bonds are alpha helix
structure.
Beta pleated structure of proteins are stablilised by intermolecular hydrogen bonding.
5. What are polysaccharides? Give two examples.
A. Those carbohydrates which on hydrolysis give large number of monosaccharides. Eg:-
Starch, Cellulose.
SHORT ANSWER QUESTION TYPE – 2 ( 3M)
1. Differentiate between
a) Amylose and Amylopectin
b) Peptide linkage and Glycosidic linkage
c) Fibrous proteins and Globular proteins.
A. a) Amylose is a branched chain polymer of alpha glucose, water soluble. Amylopectin
is a branched chain polymer of alpha glucose, water insoluble.
b) The bond CONH between two or more amino acids in polypeptides and proteins
is called peptide linkage. The oxide linkage between two or more monosaccharide
units in oligosaccharides and polysaccharides is called glycosidic linkage.
c) Fibrous proteins - Thread like structures, insoluble in water. Eg – Keratin, Myosin
Globular proteins – Chains of polypeptides coil around spherical shape, soluble in
water. Eg – Insulin, Albumin.
2. Define the following with a suitable example.
a) Oligosaccharides
b) Denaturation of proteins
c) Vitamins
A. a) Gives two to ten units of monosaccharides on hydrolysis.
Eg – Lactose, Raffinose
b) On heating or change in pH hydrogen bonds are disturbed, globules unfold and helix
get uncoiled and leads to loss of biological activity. Eg – Coagulation of egg white, milk
converted to curd.

148 | P a g e
 c) Group of organic compounds which are required in very small amounts for healthy
growth and functioning of organism. They cannot be made by organism and so have to be
part of our diet. The deficiency of a Vitamin can cause a specific disease. Eg – Fat soluble
vitamins – A, D, E, K
Water soluble vitamins – B ( except B12), C
3. What are essential and non – essential amino acids? Give two examples of each.
A. Amino acids which cannot be synthesized in the body and must be obtained through
diet are known as essential amino acids. Eg – Valine, Leucine
Amino acids which can be synthesized in the body are known as non-essential amino
acids. Eg – Alanine, Glutamic acid.
4. Write chemical reactions to show that open structure of D-glucose contains the
following
a) Straight chain
b) 5 alcohol groups
c) Aldehyde as carbonyl group
A. a) Glucose when reacted with Red P and HI gives n-hexane. It indicates the presence of
straight chain of 6 carbon atoms in glucose. Write equation.
b) On acetylation wit acetic anhydride glucose gives a Pentaacetate. Write equation.
c) Glucose on oxidation with a mild oxidizing agent like bromine water gives gluconic acid
containing the same 6 carbon atoms as present in glucose. Write equation.
5. a) Why Vit C cannot be stored in our body?
b) Write the name of Vitamin whose deficiency causes bone deformities in
children.
c) Deficiency of which Vitamin cause night blindness.
A. a) Vit C is soluble in water and regularly excreted in urine and hence cannot be stored
in body.
b) Vit D
c) Vit A
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (5M)
1. Give reasons for the following observations.
a) Amino acids behave like salts rather than simple amines or carboxylic acids.
b) Amino acids show amphoteric behavior.
c) The two strands of DNA are complementary to each other.
d) Pentaacetate of glucose does not react with hydroxyl amine.
e) Starch and cellulose both contain glucose units as monomers yet they are
structurally different.
A. a) Due to the presence of both acidic (carboxyl group ) and basic ( amino group) groups
in the same molecule.
b) They exist as Zwitter ions in R – CH-COO-
NH3+
In Zwitter ionic form amino acids show amphoteric behaviour as they react both with acids
and bases.
c) Since there is specific hydrogen bonding between heterocyclic bases, A can form
hydrogen bond with T, C can form hydrogen bond with G and vice versa.
d) As glucose forms a six membered ring in which – CHO group combines with – OH group
at C5, pentaacetate of glucose does not react with hydroxyl amine due to absence of free
– CHO group.

149 | P a g e
 e) The basic structural difference between starch as cellulose is of linkage between the
glucose units. In starch there is - D – glycosidic linkage. Both the components of starch,
amylose and amylopectin are polymers of - D – glycose. On the other hand, cellulose is a
linear polymer of β – D- glucose in which C1 of one glucose unit is connected to C4 of the
other through β – D- glycosidic linkage.
2. a) Which sugar is called invert sugar? Why is it called so?
b) How can reducing and non-reducing sugars be distinguished?
Mention the structural feature characterizing reducing sugars
A. a) Mixture of glucose and fructose is called invert sugar. It is called invert sugar
because dextro-rotatory sucrose gives mixture of glucose and fructose on hydrolysis
which is laevo-rotatory. Therefore, it is called invert sugar.
b) Those carbohydrates which reduce Tollens’ reagent to give silver mirror or form
brick red precipitate with Fehling’s solution are called reducing sugars whereas
those which do not are non-reducing sugars.
All monosaccharides are reducing sugars due to the presence of aldehyde group or
-keto group. Those disaccharides like sucrose are not reducing sugar because
aldehydic and ketonic groups not free. All polysaccharides are non-reducing.
Case Based Questions
1. Read the paragraph carefully and give the answers of the questions followed.
Glucose, Galactose, and fructose have the same chemical formula but they differ in the
organization of their atoms. The sugars we have looked at so far are linear molecules
(straight chains). That may seem odd because sugars are often drawn as rings. As it turns
out both are correct: many five- and six-carbon sugars can exist either as a linear chain
or in one or more ring-shaped forms. Cyclic sugars show mutarotation. The optical
rotation of the solution depends on the optical rotation of each anomers and their ratio in
the solution. Mutarotation was discovered by French chemist Augustin-Pierre Dubrunfaut
in 1844, when he noticed that the specific rotation of aqueous sugar solution changes
with time. These forms exist in equilibrium with each other, but equilibrium strongly
favours the ring forms (particularly in aqueous, or water-based, solution). For instance, in
solution, glucose’s main configuration is a six-membered ring. Over 99% of glucose is
typically found in this form.

(A) (B) (C)

Even when glucose is in a six-membered ring, it can occur in two different forms with
different properties. During ring formation, the ‘O’ from the carbonyl, which is converted
to a hydroxyl group, will be trapped either “above” the ring (on the same side as
the CH2OHCH2OH) or “below” the ring (on the opposite side from this group).
Answer the following questions:
(a) Why D- Glucose does show mutarotation?
(b) What will be the condensation product of glucose and fructose? Which linkage
is responsible for condensation of monosaccharides?
(c) Mention the difference in anomeric forms of glucose and evidence to support
the cyclic forms of glucose.

150 | P a g e
 OR
(c) Under what conditions glucose is converted to gluconic and
saccharic acid? Write chemical reactions.
Answer
(a) D- Glucose shows mutarotation because it undergoes interconversion between
its α and β (+) Glucopyranose structures.
(b) Sucrose. Glycosidic linkage
(c) In the α-anomer, the hydroxyl on the anomeric carbon is on the opposite side of
the ring from the terminal −CH2OH group (i.e., pointing down). In the β-anomer, it
is on the same side of the ring (pointing up).
Glucose does not give Schiff’s test; Hydrogen sulphite addition product is not formed
with NaHSO3.The reaction of Pentaacetate of glucose with hydroxylamine does not
take place. (any one )
OR
(c) Glucose is converted to gluconic acid by oxidization with bromine water and to
saccharic acid when oxidation is carried by conc. HNO3.
2. Read the paragraph carefully and give the answers of the questions followed.
Proteins are the polymers of α -amino acids and they are
connected to each other by peptide bond or peptide
linkage. Chemically, peptide linkage is an amide formed
between–COOH group and –NH2 group. The reaction
between two molecules of similar or different amino acids
proceeds through the combination of the amino group of
one molecule with the carboxyl group of the other. This
results in the elimination of a water molecule and
formation of a peptide bond –CO–NH–. The product of the
reaction is called a dipeptide because it is made up of two
amino acids. For example, when carboxyl group of glycine
combines with the amino group of alanine we get a
dipeptide, glycylalanine. Structure and shape of proteins can be studied at four
different levels, i.e., primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary, each level being
more complex than the previous one.
The final shape adopted by a newly synthesized protein is typically the most
energetically favourable one. As proteins fold, they test a variety of conformations
before reaching their final form, which is unique and compact. Folded proteins are
stabilized by thousands of noncovalent bonds between amino acids. In addition,
chemical forces between a protein and its immediate environment contribute to
protein shape and stability. For example, the proteins that are dissolved in the cell
cytoplasm have hydrophilic (water-loving) chemical groups on their surfaces,
whereas their hydrophobic (water-averse) elements tend to be tucked inside. In
contrast, the proteins that are inserted into the cell membranes display some
hydrophobic chemical groups on their surface, specifically in those regions where
the protein surface is exposed to membrane lipids. It is important to note, however,
that fully folded proteins are not frozen into shape. Rather, the atoms within these
proteins remain capable of making small movements.

151 | P a g e
 Answer the following questions:

(a) Name the forces responsible for secondary and tertiary

structure.
(b) Where does the water present in the egg go after boiling the
egg?
(c) Write one difference between α-helix and β-pleated sheet
structure of protein
OR
(c) What is the difference between native protein and denatured
protein?
Answer
(a) The forces which are responsible for tertiary structure of proteins are hydrogen
bonds, disulphide linkage, Vander walls and electrostatic forces of attraction.
(b) On boiling the water-soluble globular proteins unfold and helix get uncoiled.
During this change intermolecular hydrogen bond get disturbed. The water molecule
gets attached to the uncoiled proteins molecule through hydrogen bond.
(c) α-Helix structure: The polypeptide chains are held together (stabilized) by
Intramolecular H-bonding. β-Pleated sheet structure: The two neighbouring
polypeptide chains are held together by intermolecular H-bonding.
OR
(c) Proteins found in a biological system with unique 3D-structure and biological
activity is called native protein. When native protein is subjected to physical and
chemical change, protein loses its biological activity and is called denatured
protein.
3. Read the paragraph carefully and give answers of the questions followed.
Information regarding the sequence of nucleotides in the chain of a nucleic
acid is called its primary structure. Nucleic acids have a secondary structure also.
James Watson and Francis Crick gave a double strand helix structure for DNA. Two
nucleic acid chains are wound about each other and held together by hydrogen
bonds between pairs of bases. The two strands are complementary to each other
because the hydrogen bonds are formed between specific pairs of bases. Adenine
forms hydrogen bonds with thymine whereas cytosine forms hydrogen bonds with
guanine. In secondary structure of RNA single stranded helix is present which
sometimes folds back on itself. RNA molecules are of three types and they perform
different functions. DNA is the chemical basis of heredity and may be regarded as
the reserve of genetic information. DNA is exclusively responsible for maintaining
the identity of different species of organisms over millions of years. A DNA molecule
is capable of self-duplication during cell division and identical DNA strands are
transferred to daughter cells.
Answer the following questions:
(a) Name the segment of DNA which acts as the instrumental manual for the
synthesis of proteins.
(b) Name the chemical change in DNA that leads to the synthesis of proteins
with different amino acids.
(c) (i) Write the sequence of chemicals present in nucleic acids.
(ii) What are the different types of RNA found in the cell?

152 | P a g e
 OR
(c) Write the main functional differences between DNA and RNA.
Of the four bases name those which are common to both DNA and RNA.
Answer
3. (a) Gene
(b) Mutation
(c) (i)Phosphate- sugar-base
(ii) m-RNA, t-RNA, r-RNA
OR
(c) DNA is the chemical basis of heredity and RNA molecules are responsible for
protein synthesis. Common bases in DNA and RNA Adenine, Guanine and Cytosine.

4. Read the paragraph carefully and give answers of the questions followed
An average Indian derives 61 to 64% of energy from consumption of food rich in
carbohydrates. A study published in the journal diabetes care has recommended
reducing this to 49 to 56% for remission or prevention of type-2 diabetes one of the
leading causes of death worldwide. Along with reducing carbohydrates intake the
study suggests that one should also increase protein intake. (14-20%) of the total
energy consumption. Fats should contribute not more than 21 to 27% of the total
energy consumption. In simple words 50% of plate should consist of fruits and green
vegetables, 25% carbohydrates of choice, 25% contain food rich in protein.
Physically inactive, obese and older individuals as well as presiding in urban
locations may require greater reduction in carbohydrate intake. The keto diet, very
low-calorie diet is best.
Answer the following questions:

a) Why do elderly people reduce more intake of carbohydrates than younger

people?
b) Which carbohydrate are healthier out of polysaccharides, monosaccharides
and disaccharides? Give reason.
c) i)Which hormone controls blood sugar in our body?
ii) Why should diabetic patients do mild exercise like walking every day?
OR
c) i) Why should protein be increased in diet especially for growing children?
ii) Why should our plate have 50% fruits and vegetables.
Answer
a) It is because rate of metabolism is slow in elderly people than younger people.
b) Polysaccharides are healthier because they produce energy slowly.
c) i) Insulin
ii) It is because rate of metabolism will increase and blood sugar will decrease.
OR
c) i) Proteins are essential for growth and development of body. They
strengthen muscles of our body.
ii) Fruits and vegetables are rich in vitamins, minerals and fibers
which help in digestion and keep our body healthy.

153 | P a g e
 5. Read the paragraph carefully and give answers of the questions followed
Vitamins are vital for life. A, D, E, K are fat soluble vitamins whereas B 1, B2, B3, B5,
B6, B7, B9, C are water soluble vitamins. Vitamin A helps in improving eye sight.
Vitamin C prevents scurvy and increases immunity. Vitamin D helps in strong bones
and teeth. Our requirement of vitamin D is 15mcg. We get vitamin D from sunlight,
eggs, dairy products, orange, oats and mushroom etc. Citrus fruits contain vitamin
C. Carrot contains vitamin A. We should include chick pea flour in our diet to
prevent inflammation. It has phytonutrients and fibres which have anti-
inflammatory properties. It prevents accumulation of fats. It contains Fe, Cu, Mg,
fibre, K which are essential to control our wait. It increases our immune system. It
contains proteins, amino acids, Mg, vitamin B and P. Pomegranates are good source
of vitamin C which our body needs to make collagen. It is rich source of B-complex,
vitamin B5 folates pyridoxine and vitamin K. It contains essential minerals like Ca,
Cu, Mg and Mn. Pomegranates are rich source of insoluble fibres which help us
keep fuller for longer time and regulate bowel function.
Answer the following questions:

a) Why should vitamin B and C must be taken regularly in diet?

b) Which vitamin deficiency causes pernicious anemia? Is it fat or water
soluble?
c) i) What is meant by vitamin B-complex?
ii) What is deficiency decease and source of vitamin E
OR

c) i) Which vitamin deficiency leads to bleeding for long time?

What is its source?
ii) What is the role of fibre in our body?
Answer
a) It is because vitamin B and C are water soluble and excreted through urine. So
it should be taken regularly.
b) Vitamin B12. It is neither fat nor water soluble
c) i) It consists of vitamin B1, B2, B3, B5, B6, B7, B9 and B12.
ii) Vitamin E deficiency leads to dry skin and loss of reproductive power. Its
source is oils like cotton seed oil.
OR
c) i) Vitamin K. It is present in green leafy vegetables.
ii) Fiber helps in digestion and helps to reduce weight.

154 | P a g e
155 | P a g e
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION
CLASS XII
SAMPLE PAPER-I
CHEMISTRY (THEORY)

BLUEPRINT
CASE TOTA
S.No MCQ A/R VSA SA LA
CHAPTERS BASED L
.
1M 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 70
1 SOLUTIONS 2 (1) 5 (1) 7 (2)
2 ELECTROCHEMISTRY 2(2) 3 (1) 4 (1) 9 (4)
3 CHEMICAL KINETICS 1 (1) 1 (1) 2 (1) 3 (1) 7 (4)
THE d- AND f-BLOCK
4 1 (1) 1 (1) 5 (1) 7 (3)
ELEMENTS
COORDINATION
5 3 (1) 4 (1) 7 (2)
COMPOUNDS
HALOALKANES AND
6 1 (1) 2 (1) 3 (1) 6 (3)
HALOARENES
ALCOHOLS, PHENOLS
7 2 (2) 1 (1) 3 (1) 6 (4)
AND ETHERS
ALDEHYDES, KETONES
8 2 (2) 1(1) 2 (1) 3 (1) 8 (5)
AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
9 AMINES 1 (1) 5 (1) 6 (2)
10 BIOMOLECULES 2 (2) 2 (1) 3 (1) 7 (4)
12 10 21 15 70
4 (4) 8 (2)
(12) (5) (7) (3) (33)
Note: - Marks are outside of bracket and number of questions in bracket

156 | P a g e
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION
CLASS XII
SAMPLE PAPER-I
CHEMISTRY (THEORY)
Time allowed: 3 hours Maximum marks: 70

General Instructions:
Read the following instructions carefully and follow them:

(i) This question paper contains 33 questions. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Question paper is divided into FIVE sections - Section A, B, C, D and E.
(iii) Section A - question number 1 to 16 are multiple choice type questions. Each
question carries 1 mark.
(iv) Section B - question number 17 to 21 are very short answer type questions.
Each question carries 2 marks.
(v) Section C - question number 22 to 28 are short answer type questions. Each
question carries 3 marks.
(vi) Section D - question number 29 and 30 are case-based questions. Each
question carries 4 marks.
(vii) Section E- question number 31 to 33 are long answer type questions. Each
question carries 5 marks.
(viii) There is no overall choice given in the question paper. However, an internal
choice has been provided in few questions in all the Sections, except Section -A.
(ix) Use of calculator is NOT allowed.

SECTION-A
16x1=16
Question No. 1 to 16 are Multiple Choice type questions carrying 1 mark each.

1. On increasing temperature,
(a) ionic conductance increases and electronic conductance decreases.
(b) ionic conductance decreases and electronic conductance increases.
(c) both ionic and electronic conductance increase.
(d) both ionic and electronic conductance decrease.

2. What is the correct order of reactivity of alcohols in the following reaction?

(a) 1° > 2° > 3° (b) 1° < 2° > 3°

(c) 3° > 2° > 1° (d) 3° > 1° > 2°

3. Which cell will measure standard electrode potential of copper electrode?

(a) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 0.1 bar)| H+ (aq., 1 M) || Cu2+ (aq., 1M)| Cu(s)
(b) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 1 bar) | H+ (aq., 1 M) || Cu2+ (aq., 2M)| Cu(s)
(c) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 1 bar) | H+ (aq., 1 M) || Cu2+ (aq., 1M)| Cu(s)
(d) Pt(s)| H2 (g, 1 bar) | H+ (aq., 0.1 M)|| Cu2+ (aq., 1M)| Cu(s)

4. Phenol is less acidic than

(a) Ethanol (b) o-nitrophenol
(c) o-methylphenol (d) o-methoxyphenol

157 | P a g e
 5. The unit of rate and rate constant are same for a reaction of –
(a) zero order (b) first order
(c) Second order (d) third order

6. Formic acid and ethanoic acid can be distinguished by:

(a) Sod. Bicarbonate test (b) Tollen’s test
(c) Iodoform test (d) Lucas test

7. In which of the following pairs, both the ions are coloured in aqueous solutions?
[Atomic no of Sc = 21, Ti = 22, Ni = 28, Co = 27, Cu = 29]
(a) Sc3+, Ti (b) Sc3+, Co2+
(c) Ni2+, Cu+ (d) Ni2+, Ti3+

8. In Clemmensen’s Reduction, carbonyl compound is treated with .

(a) Zn-Hg amalgam + HCl (b) Na-Hg amalgam + HCl
(c) Zn-Hg amalgam + HNO3 (d) Na-Hg amalgam + HNO3

9. Which of the following statements is not true about glucose?

(a) It is an aldohexose. (b) On heating with HI it forms n-hexane.
(c) It is present in furanose form. (d) It does not give 2,4-DNP test

10. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their densities.

(a) (a) < (b) < (c) < (d) (b) (a) < (c) < (d) < (b)
(c) (d) < (c) < (b) < (a) (d) (b) < (d) < (c) < (a)

11. Curdling of milk is an example of

(a) breaking of peptide linkage. (b) breaking of protein into amino acids.
(c) hydrolysis of lactose. (d) denaturation of protein.

12. The IUPAC name of CH3–CH2-CH2-N(CH3)-C2H5 is

(c) N, N-diethylpropan-1-amine (b) N, N-dimethylpropan-1-amine
(c) N-Ethyl–N-methylpropan-1-amine (d) N-methyl-1-pentanamine

For questions number 13 to 16, two statements are given one labelled as Assertion (A)
and the other labelled as Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from
the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) as given below:
(A) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true and Reason (R) is the correct
explanation of the Assertion (A).
(B) Both Assertion (A) and Reason (R) are true, but Reason (R) is not the correct
explanation of the Assertion (A).
(C) Assertion (A) is true, but Reason (R) is false.
(D) Assertion (A) is false, but Reason (R) is true.

13. Assertion (A) : The solubility of aldehydes and ketones in water decreases with
increase of size of the alkyl group
Reason (R) : Alkyl groups are electron releasing groups

158 | P a g e
14. Assertion (A) : Transition metals have high melting point.
Reason (R) : Transition metals have completely filled d-orbitals.

15. Assertion (A) : All collisions of reactant molecules lead to product formation.
Reason (R) : Only those collisions in which molecules have correct orientation and
sufficient kinetic energy lead to compound formation.

16. Assertion (A) : (CH3)3C-O-CH3 gives (CH3)3 C-I and CH3OH on treatment with HI.
Reason (R) : The reaction occurs by SN1 mechanism.

SECTION - B
17. (i) Why is an increase in temperature observed on mixing chloroform and acetone?
(ii) Why does sodium chloride solution freeze at a lower temperature than water?

18. Answer the following questions on the basis of the given plot of potential energy vs
reaction coordinate:

(i) What is the threshold energy for the reaction?

(ii) What is the activation energy for forward reaction?
(iii) What is the activation energy for backward reaction?
(iv) What is enthalpy change for the forward reaction?

19. Give reasons:

(i) C-Cl bond length in chlorobenzene is shorter than C-Cl bond length in CH3-Cl.
(ii) SN1 reactions are accompanied by racemisation in optically active alkyl halides.

20. Write the reagents used in the following reactions:

(i) C6H5-CO-CH3 C6H5-CH2-CH3
(ii) CH3COOH CH3-COCl
OR
Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their property as indicated:
(i) CH3COCH3, C6H5-CO- C6H5, CH3CHO (reactivity towards nucleophilic addition
reaction)
(ii) Cl2CH-COOH, Cl-CH2-COOH, CCl3-COOH (acidic character).

21. Write the reactions involved when D-glucose is treated with the following reagents:
(i) HCN (ii) Br2 water

159 | P a g e
 SECTION – C

22. From the following molar conductivities at infinite dilution, calculate the limiting
molar conductivity, Λm0 for NH4ОН. (3m)
Λm for Ba(OH)2 = 457.6 Ω cm mol
0 -1 2 -1

Λm0 for BaCl2 = 240.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Λm0 for NH4Cl = 129.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

23. (A), (B) and (C) are three non-cyclic functional isomers of a carbonyl compound
with molecular formula C4H8O. Isomers (A) and (C) give positive Tollens' test
whereas isomer (B) does not give Tollens' test but gives positive Iodoform test.
Isomers (A) and (B) on reduction with Zn(Hg)/conc. HCl give the same product (D).
(i) Write the structures of (A), (B), (C) and (D).
(ii) Out of (A), (B) and (C) isomers, which one is least reactive towards addition
of HCN? (2+1)

24. Define the following terms:

(i) Pseudo first order reaction
(ii) Half-life period of a reaction
(iii) Molecularity of a reaction. (1+1+1)

25. Write chemical equations for the following reactions: (Any three) (1+1+1)
(a) Hydroboration - oxidation reaction
(b) Williamson Synthesis
(c) Friedel-Crafts Alkylation of Anisole
(d) Reimer-Tiemann Reaction

26. (i) What type of isomerism is shown by the complex [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3? 1

(ii) On the basis of crystal field theory, write the electronic configuration for d ion
4

if Δo > P. 1
(iii) Write the hybridisation and shape of [CoF6] (Atomic number of Co = 27). 1
3-

27. (i) Write equation for preparation of 1-iodobutane from 1-chlorobutane. 1

(ii) Out of 2-bromopentane, 2-bromo-2-methylbutane and 1-bromopentane, which
compound is most reactive towards elimination reaction? 1
(iii) Give IUPAC name of- 1

28. Differentiate between:

(a) Native protein and denaturated protein 1
(b) RNA and DNA 1
(c) Essential amino acids and non-essential amino acids. 1

160 | P a g e
 SECTION – D
The following questions are case based. Read the passage carefully and answer the
questions that follow.
29. Coordination compounds are the compounds in which the central metal atom is
linked to a number of ions or neutral molecules by coordinate bonds and the donor
atoms, molecules or anions which donate a pair of electrons to the metal atom or
ion and form a coordinate bond with it are called ligands. Coordination number is
the number of atoms or ions immediately surrounding a central atom in a complex
or a crystal.
Coordination number of Ni2+ is 4 and it forms two complexes A and B as given below:
NiCl2 + KCN → A (Cyano complex)
NiCl2 + KCl →B (Chloro complex)
(i) Which of the following is the correct IUPAC name of complex A? 1
(a) Potassium tetracyanonickelate (I)
(b) Potassium tetranitrilenickelate (II)
(c) Potassium tetracyanonickelate (III)
(d) Potassium tetracyanonickelate (II)
(ii) The correct formula of the complex B will be 1
(a) K2[NiCl4] (b) K2[Ni(CN)]
(c) K3[NiCl4] (d) K[NiCl4]
(iii) The magnetic nature of A is 1
(a) paramagnetic (b) diamagnetic
(c) ferrimagnetic (d) ferromagnetic
(iv) The state of hybridisation of the complex B is 1
(a) sp (b) sp²
(c) sp³ (d) sp³d²
OR
The geometry of the complex A is
(a) tetrahedral (b) trigonal planar
(c) square planar (d) trigonal bipyramidal
30. In a galvanic cell, chemical energy of a redox reaction is converted into electrical
energy, whereas in an electrolytic cell the redox reaction occurs on passing
electricity. The simplest galvanic cell is in which Zn rod is placed in a solution of
ZnSO4, and Cu rod is placed in a solution of CuSO4.The two rods are connected by
a metallic wire through a voltmeter. The two solutions are joined by a salt bridge.
The difference between the two electrode potentials of the two electrodes is known
as electromotive force. In the process of electrolysis, the decomposition of a
substance takes place by passing an electric current. One mole of electric charge
when passed through a cell will discharge half a mole of a divalent metal ion such
as Cu2+. This was first formulated by Faraday in the form of laws of electrolysis.
Answer the following questions:
(a) What is the function of a salt bridge in a galvanic cell? 1
(b) When does galvanic cell behave like an electrolytic cell? 1
(c) Can copper sulphate solution be stored in a pot made of zinc? 2
Explain with the help of the value of E cell.
θ

(Eθ Cu2+/Cu = 0.34V ) (Eθ Zn2+/Zn = - 0.76V )

OR

161 | P a g e
 (c) How much charge in terms of Faraday is required for the following: 2
(i) 1 mol of MnO4 to Mn
- 2+

(ii) 1mol of H2O to O2

31. (i) Define azeotropes. 1
(ii) Out of two 0.1 molal aqueous solutions of glucose and of potassium chloride,
which one will have a higher boiling point. 1
(iii) Determine the osmotic pressure of a solution prepared by dissolving 25 mg of
K2SO4 in 2 litres of water at 25 0C assuming it to be completely dissociated.
(Atomic masses K = 39 u, S = 32 1, 0 = 16 u). 3
OR
(i) What are isotonic solutions? 1
(ii) Identify which liquid will have a higher vapour pressure at 90°C if the
boiling points of two liquids A and B are 140°C and 180°C, respectively. 1
(iii) Calculate the boiling point of solution when 2 g of Na 2SO4 (Molar mass =
142 g mol-1) was dissolved in 50 g of water, assuming Na2SO4 undergoes
complete ionisation. (Kb for water = 0.52 K kg mol-1).
32. Assign reasons for the following (Answer any FIVE).
a) The enthalpies of atomisation of transition elements are high.
b) The transition metals and many of their compounds act as good catalysts.
c) From element to element, the actinoid contraction is greater than the
lanthanoid contraction.
d) The Eº value for the Mn3+/Mn2+ couple is much more positive than that of
Cr3+/Cr2+.
e) Scandium (Z = 21) does not exhibit variable oxidation states and yet it is
regarded as a transition element.
f) Ce4+ is used as an oxidising agent in volumetric analysis.
g) Zn2+ salts are white while Cu2+ salts are blue.

33. (i) Write the structures of main products when aniline reacts with the following
reagents:
(a) Br2 water (b) HCI (c) (CH3CO)2O/pyridine

(ii) Arrange the following in the increasing order of their boiling point:
C2H5NH2, C2H5OH, (CH3)3N
(iii) Give a simple chemical test to distinguish between: (CH3)2NH and (CH3)3N
OR

(i) An aromatic compound 'A' of molecular formula C7H7ON undergoes a series

of reactions as shown below. Write the structures of A, B and C.

(ii) Arrange the following in increasing order of their basic strength:

C6H5NH2, CH3—CH2—NH2, CH3-NH-CH3
(iii) Give one chemical test to distinguish between: Aniline and benzylamine.

***********************************

162 | P a g e
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION
CLASS XII
CHEMISTRY (THEORY)
Time allowed: 3 hours Maximum marks: 70
MARKING SCHEME
Q.N Expected answer/ Value points Marks
o
SECTION - A
1 a 1
2 c 1
3 c 1
4 b 1
5 a 1
6 b 1
7 d 1
8 a 1
9 c 1
10 a 1
11 d 1
12 c 1
13 b 1
14 c 1
15 d 1
16 a 1
SECTION - B
17 (i) The bonds between chloroform molecules and molecules of acetone
are dipole-dipole interactions but on mixing, the chloroform and 1
acetone molecules, they start forming hydrogen bonds which are
stronger bonds resulting in the release of energy. This gives rise to an
increase in temperature.
(ii) When a non-volatile solute is dissolved in a solvent, the vapour
pressure decreases. As a result, the solvent freezes at a lower 1
temperature.

18 (i) Threshold energy for the reaction = 300 kJmol-1 ½

(ii) Activation energy for the forward reaction= 150 kJmol-1 ½
(iii) Activation energy for the backward reaction = 200 kJmol-1 ½
½
(iv) enthalpy change for the forward reaction= - 50 kJmol-1

19 (i) In chlorobenzene, C - Cl bond acquires partial double bond character 1

while in methyl chloride, C-CI bond has pure single bond character.
As a result, C-Cl bond in chlorobenzene is shorter than methyl
chloride.
(ii) Carbocations are intermediate in SN1 reactions. Carbocations being
sp2 hybridised are planar species, therefore, attack of nucleophile on
it can occur from both front and rear with almost equal ease giving a
racemic mixture.
1

163 | P a g e
20 (i) Zn-Hg, conc. HCl or H2NNH2 and KOH/ethylene glycol, Heat 1
(ii) PCl5 or SOC12 1
OR
(i) C6H5-CO- C6H5 < CH3COCH3 < CH3CHO 1
1
(ii) Cl-CH2-COOH < Cl2-CH-COOH < CC13-COOH

21
1

SECTION - C
22

23 (i) A= CH3CH2CH2CHO ½
B= CH3CH2COCH3 ½
C= (CH3)2CH-CHO ½
D= CH3CH2CH2CH3 ½
(ii) B= CH3CH2COCH3 1

24 Correct definitions. 1+1+

1
252 (Any three) 1+1+
(a) Hydroboration - oxidation reaction 1

(b) Williamson Synthesis

R-X + R’ONa → R-O-R’ + NaX

164 | P a g e
 (c) Friedel-Crafts Alkylation of Anisole

(d) Reimer-Tiemann Reaction

26 (i) Hydration isomerism 1

(ii) t2g4 eg0 1
(iii) Hybridisation: sp3d2, Shape: Octahedral ½ +½
27 (i) 1
(ii) 2-bromo-2-methylbutane 1
(iii) 4-Bromo-4-methylpent-2-ene 1
28 (a) Protein found in a biological system with unique three-dimensional 1
structure and biological activity is called native protein.
When a protein in its native form is subjected to change such as
change in temperature, change in pH, its 2º and 3º structures are
destroyed and it loses its biological activity. The protein thus
formed is called denatured protein.
(b) RNA is single stranded nucleic acid containing D-ribose sugar and
N- bases such as adenine, guanine, cytosine and uracil. 1
DNA is double stranded nucleic acid containing 2-deoxy-D-ribose
sugar and N- bases such as adenine, guanine, cytosine and
thymine.
(c) Amino acids which are not synthesized by the human body are
known as essential amino acids. On the other hand, amino acids
which are needed for health and growth of human beings and are 1
synthesized by the human body are called non-essential amino
acids.
SECTION - D
29 (i) (d) Potassium tetracyanonickelate (II) 1
(ii) (a) K2[NiCl4] 1
(iii) (b) diamagnetic 1
1
(iv) (c) sp³ OR (c) square planar
30 a) maintain electrical neutrality within the internal circuit/ helps in 1
preventing the cell from taking its reaction to equilibrium.
b) When an external voltage, greater than the cell potential is 1
applied.

165 | P a g e
 c) No. Zinc is more reactive than copper. Thus, if we will store 1
copper sulphate solution in zinc pot then zinc will displace copper
from its solution. The following reaction will take place:-
1
Zn + CuSO4 → ZnSO4 + Cu.
OR
(i) 5F 1
(ii) 2F 1

31 (i) Mixtures having same composition in liquid and vapour phase, 1

boil at a constant temperature and cannot be separated by
fractional distillation.
(ii) 0.1 m KCl 1
(iii)

1
OR
(i) Solutions having same osmotic pressure. 1
(ii) Liquid A 1
(iii)

1
32 (Any Five) 5x1=
a) This is because transition metals have strong metallic bonds as 5
they have a large number of unpaired electrons.
b) Because of their variable oxidation states, transition metals form
unstable intermediate compounds.
c) This is due to poorer shielding by 5f-electrons in actinoids than
that by 4f-electrons in the lanthanoids.
d) This is due to much larger third ionisation energy of Mn as Mn2+
is very stable on account of stable d³ configuration.
e) Sc has partially filled d-orbitals in the ground state (3d¹ 4s²).
f) Ce4+ has the tendency to attain +3 oxidation state which is more
stable.

166 | P a g e
 g) Zn2+ ion has all its orbitals completely filled whereas in Cu 2+ ion
there is one half-filled 3d-orbital. Therefore, due to d-d transition
Cu²+ has a tendency to form coloured salts whereas Zn 2+ has no
such tendency.

33 (i)

1
(i) By Hinsberg’s reagent test – Brief explanation. 1
OR
(ii)

1+1+
1

(iii) C6H5NH2 < CH3—CH2—NH2 < CH3-NH-CH3 1

(iv) Azo dye test 1

***************************

167 | P a g e
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION
CLASS XII
SAMPLE PAPER-II
CHEMISTRY (THEORY)
MCQ A&R SA – I SA - 2 CBQ LA
Sl. NAME OF THE
Total
No. CHAPTER 1 Mark 1 Mark 2 Marks 3 Marks 4 Marks 5 Marks

1 Solutions --- --- 2(1) --- --- 5(1) 7(2)

2 Electrochemistry 1(1) 1(1) --- 3(1) 4(1) --- 9(4)

3 Chemical Kinetics 1(2) --- 2(1) 3(1) --- --- 7(4)

d and f Block
4 1(2) --- --- --- --- 5(1) 7(3)
Elements
Coordination
5 --- --- --- 3(1) 4(1) --- 7(2)
Compounds
Haloalkanes and
6 1(2) 1(1) --- 3(1) --- --- 6(4)
Haloarenes
Alcohols, Phenols
7 1(1) --- 2(1) 3(1) --- --- 6(3)
and Ethers
Aldehydes,
8 Ketones and 1(2) 1(1) 2(1) 3(1) --- --- 8(5)
Carboxylic Acids

9 Amines 1(1) --- --- --- --- 5(1) 6(2)

10 Biomolecules 1(1) 1(1) 2(1) 3(1) --- --- 7(4)

TOTAL 1 (12) 1(4) 2(5) 3(7) 4(2) 5(3) 70(33)

Note: 1. Number outside the bracket indicates marks of each question and the number
enclosed within bracket denotes number of questions.
2. Prepared as per CBSE CLASS XII CHEMISTRY SQP 2023-24.

168 | P a g e
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION
CLASS XII
SAMPLE PAPER-II
CHEMISTRY (THEORY)
Max. Marks: 70 Time: 3
Hours
General Instructions:
a) There are 33 questions in this question paper with internal choice.
b) Section A consists of 16 multiple-choice questions carrying 1 mark each.
c) Section B consists of 5 very short answer questions carrying 2 marks each.
d) Section C consists of 7 short answer questions carrying 3 marks each.
e) Section D consists of 2 case-based questions carrying 4 marks each.
f) Section E consists of 3 long answer questions carrying 5 marks each.
g) All questions are compulsory.
h) Use of log tables and calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
The following questions are multiple-choice questions with one correct answer. Each
question carries 1 mark. There is no internal choice in this section.
1. Which of the following statement is not true about glucose?
(a) It is an aldohexose (b) On heating with HI it forms n-hexane 1
(c) It is present in pyranose form (d)It forms orange precipitate with 2,4-DNP
2. Write the IUPAC name of the product of the following reaction 1
C6H5N2Cl + H2O →
(a)Chlorobenzene (b) Bromobenzene (c) p-chlorophenol (d) Phenol
3. Which of the following lanthanoids show +4 oxidation state besides the 1
characteristic oxidation state +3 of lanthanoids?
(a) Ce (b) Eu (c) Tb (d) Dy
4. If 96500 coulomb electricity is passed through CuSO4 solution, it will liberate 1
(At. Wt of Cu=63.5g/mol)
(a) 63.5 g of Cu (b) 31.75 g of Cu (c) 127 g of Cu (d) 100 g of Cu
5. What is the correct order of reactivity of alcohols in the following reaction? 1
R—OH + HCl → R—Cl+ H2O
(a) 1° > 2° > 3° (b) 1° < 2° > 3° (c) 3° > 2° > 1° (d) 3° > 1° > 2°
6. Which of the following aldehydes doesn’t undergo Cannizzaro’s reaction? 1

(a) (b) (c) HCHO (d) CH3CHO

7. Which of the following expressions is correct for the rate of reaction given below? 1

8. Iodoform is used as an 1
(a) antiseptic (b) analgesic (c) anesthetic (d) antipyretic
9. Which of the following compounds has –Cl in arylic position? 1
(a) Ethyl chloride (b) Chlorobenzene (c) Vinyl chloride (d) Benzyl chloride
10. The reagent which does not react with both Propanone and Benzaldehyde: 1
(a) Grignard reagent (b) Tollen’s reagent (c) Zn-Hg /Conc.HCl (d)Fehling solution

169 | P a g e
11. KMnO4 is acidified using H2SO4 in titrations and HCl is not used because 1
(a) H2SO4 is stronger acid than HCl (b) HCl is oxidised to Cl2 by KMnO4
(c) H2SO4 is dibasic acid (d) rate of reaction is faster in presence of H2SO4
12. The slope of the following graph is 1

𝑘 2.303 1
(a) (b) (c) k (d)
2.303 𝑘 𝑘
For question number 13 to 16 two statements labelled as Assertion (A) and Reason (R

Select the most appropriate answer from the options given below:
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false but R is true.
13. Assertion: Conductivity of a solution decreases with decrease in concentration. 1
Reason: The number of ions per unit volume of solution decreases.
14. Assertion : D(+)Glucose is dextrorotatory in nature. 1
Reason : ‘D’ represents its dextrorotatory nature.
15. Assertion: Aryl halides undergo nucleophilic substitution reactions more easily. 1
Reason: The carbon halogen bond in aryl halides has partial double bond
character.
16. Assertion: Sodium hydrogen sulphite adds to aldehydes and ketones to form the 1
addition product.
Reason: Reaction of aldehydes with Sodium hydrogen sulphite is useful for
separation and purification of aldehydes.
SECTION B
This section contains 5 questions with internal choice in one question. The following
questions are very short answer type and carry 2 marks each.

17. (a). Define molality. 1

(b). Give an example for Solid-Solid solution 1
18. What happens when
(i) Phenol reacts with bromine water? 1
(ii) Anisole reacts with HI? 1
Write the chemical equations involved in the above reactions.
19. Name the nitrogenous bases present in RNA. Which one of these is not present in 1+1
DNA?
20. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of property mentioned 1+1
within brackets.
(a) CH3CHO, CH3CH2OH, CH3OCH3, CH3CH2CH3 (boiling point)
(b) Ethanal, Propanal, Propanone, Butanone (reactivity towards nucleophilic
addition reaction)
21. A first order reaction has rate constant of 1·15 x 10-3 s-1. How long will 5 g of 2
this reactant take to reduce to 3g? (log 5 = 0.6990 , log 3=0.4771)

170 | P a g e
 SECTION C
This section contains 7 questions with internal choice in one question. The following
questions are short answer type and carry 3 marks each
22. Write Nernst equation for the cell in which the following reaction takes place 3
Mg(s) + 2Ag+(0.0001M) → Mg2+(0.130M) + 2Ag(s)
Calculate its �8�6�R�Y�Y if �8�B�@�T 2+/�@�T = -2.36 V and �8𝐴�T
�B 1+
/𝐴�T = 0.81 V (log 13=1.114)
23. (a) Identify the chiral molecule in the following pair: 1
(i) 3-methylbutan-2-ol (ii) 2,4-dimethylbutan-3-ol
(b) Write the structure of the product when Chlorobenzene is treated with methyl 1
chloride in the presence of sodium metal and dry ether.
(c) Write the structure of the alkene formed by dehydrohalogenation of 1
1-bromo-1- methylcyclohexane with alcoholic KOH
24. (a) Draw the Geometrical isomers of [ Pt(en)2Cl2]2+ and name the optically active 2
isomer.
(b) On the basis of crystal field theory write the electronic configuration for d5 ion 1
for which Δo < P
25. (a) Draw the Zwitter ion structure of Alanine CH3CH(COOH)(NH2) 1
(b) Lysine is an essential amino acid. Give reason. 1
(c) Give differences between Fibrous and Globular protein 1
(or)
(c) Define denaturation of protein. Name the structure of protein that remains
intact after denaturation
26. (a) pKa of chloroacetic acid is smaller than acetic acid. Give reason. 1
(b) Write chemical reaction for : i) HVZ reaction ii) Gattermann-Koch reaction 2
27. (a) Explain the mechanism of dehydration of ethanol to ethene. 2
(b) write the chemical equation for the conversion of Ethyl magnesium chloride 1
to propanol
28. (a) The rate constants of a reaction at 200K and 500K are 0.02s–1 and 0.20s–1 2
respectively. Calculate the value of Ea (Given 2.303R = 19.15 JK-1mol-1)
(b) Define Collision frequency. 1
SECTION D
The following questions are case-based questions. Each question has an internal
choice and carries 4 (1+1+2) marks each. Read the passage carefully and answer the
questions that follow.
29. Coordination compounds contain a metallic element as the central atom and are
therefore referred to as metal complexes. These types of coordination complexes
generally consist of a transition element as the central atom. It can be noted that
the central atom in these complexes is called the coordination centre. A chemical
compound in which the central ion or atom (or the coordination centre) is bound
to a set number of atoms, molecules, or ions is called a coordination entity. Some
examples of such coordination entities include [CoCl3(NH3)3] and [Fe(CN)6]4-.
In coordination compounds, the central atoms or ions are typically Lewis Acids
and can, therefore, act as electron-pair acceptors. The atoms, molecules, or ions
that are bound to the coordination centre or the central atom/ion are referred to
as ligands. These ligands can either be a simple ion or molecule, such as Cl– or
NH3 or in the form of relatively large molecules, such as ethane-1,2-diamine (NH2-

171 | P a g e
 CH2-CH2-NH2). The coordination sphere is the non-ionizable part of a complex
compound, which consists of a central transition metal ion surrounded by
neighbouring atoms or groups enclosed in a square bracket.
(a) Write down the formula of: Tetraamineaquachloridocobalt(III) chloride.
1
(b) Calculate the coordination number of Co in [Co(en)3]3+. 1
(c) Give Chemical test to distinguish between [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4 and 2
[Co(NH3)5SO4]Br.
(or)
Describe the shape and magnetic behaviour of the complex [Co(NH3)6]3+.
(At.no. of Cu=29) 2
30.
Electricity can be produced when electrons move from one element to another in
certain types of reactions (such as redox reactions). Typically, electrochemistry
deals with the overall reactions when multiple redox reactions occur
simultaneously, connected via some external electric current and a suitable
electrolyte. In other words, electrochemistry is also concerned with chemical
phenomena that involve charge separation (as seen commonly in liquids such as
solutions). The dissociation of charge often involves charge transfer that occurs
homogeneously or heterogeneously between different chemical species. A
spontaneous chemical process is one which can take place on its own, and in
such a process, the Gibbs free energy of a system decreases. In electrochemistry,
spontaneous reaction (redox reaction) results in the conversion of chemical energy
into electrical energy. The reverse process is also possible where a non-
spontaneous chemical reaction occurs by supplying electricity. These
interconversions are carried out in equipment called an electrochemical cell.
1
(a) Name the electrochemical cell generally used in hearing aids. 1
(b) ∧m of CH3COOH increases drastically while that of CH3COONa increases
gradually on dilution. Explain
(or) 1
Can copper sulphate solution be stored in zinc pot? Explain.
(�8�g�[
0 2+
/�g�[ = −0.76𝑉 , �8�6�b 2+ /�6�b = 0.34𝑉)
0
2
(c) The standard electrode potential for Daniell cell is 1.1 V. Calculate the
standard Gibbs energy for the cell reaction. (F = 96,500 C mol-1)
SECTION E
The following questions are long answer type and carry 5 marks each. All questions
have an internal choice.
31. Attempt any five of the following: 1x5
(a) Which of the following ions will have a magnetic moment value of 1.73 BM.
Sc3+, Ti3+, Ti2+, Cu2+, Zn2+
(b) In order to protect iron from corrosion, which one will you prefer as a
sacrificial electrode, Ni or Zn? Why? (Given standard electrode potentials of
Ni, Fe and Zn are -0.25 V, -0.44 V and -0.76 V respectively.)
(c) The second ionization enthalpies of chromium and manganese are 1592 and
1509 kJ/mol respectively. Explain the lower value of Mn.
(d) Give two similarities in the properties of Sc and Zn.
(e) What is actinoid contraction? What causes actinoid contraction?
(f) The transition metals and their compounds act as good catalysts. Give reason
(g) Write the ionic equation for reaction of KI with acidified KMnO4.

172 | P a g e
32. (a) How will you convert the following : 2
(i) Benzoic acid to aniline (ii) Aniline to p-bromoaniline
(b) Why aniline does not give Friedel-Crafts reaction? 1
(c) Arrange the following in the increasing order of their pKb values : 1
C6H5NH2, NH3, C2H5NH2, (CH3)3N
(d) Give a test to distinguish between CH3CH2NH2 and (CH3CH2)2NH. 1
(or)
(a) An aromatic compound ‘A’ on treatment with aqueous ammonia and heating
forms compound ‘B’ which on heating with Br2 and KOH forms a compound ‘C’ 3
of molecular formula C6H7N. Write the structures and IUPAC names of
compounds A, B and C.
(b) Explain with equation Gabriel Phthalimide reaction for the preparation of 2
primary amines.
33. (a) State Henry’s law. 1
(b) Give two differences between ideal and non-ideal solution. 1
(c) Calculate the boiling point of solution when 4g of MgSO4 (Molar 3
mass:120g/mol) is dissolved in 100g of water, assuming MgSO4 undergoes
complete ionization. [Kb for water =0.52 K kg mol-1]
(or)
(a) Define azeotropic mixture. 1
(b) What happens when red blood cells are placed in 0.1 %( m/v) NaCl solution? 1
(c) The Vapour pressure of water at 20ºC is 17.5 mm Hg. Calculate the vapour 3
pressure of water at 20ºC when 25 g of glucose (Molar mass = 180 g mol-1) is
dissolved in 150 g of water.

173 | P a g e
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN BENGALURU
REGION
MARKING SCHEME

Subject : Chemistry (043)

Class : XII

1. (d)It forms orange precipitate with 2,4-DNP 1

2. (d) Phenol 1
3. (a) Ce 1
4. (b) 31.75 g of Cu 1
5. (c) 3° > 2° > 1° 1
6. (d) CH3CHO 1
7. 1

8. (a) antiseptic 1
9. (b) Chlorobenzene 1
10. (d)Fehling solution 1
11. (b) HCl is oxidised to Cl2 by KMnO4 1
12. 1

13. (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A 1

14. (c) A is true but R is false. 1

15. (d) A is false but R is true. 1
16. (b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A. 1
17. (a) Number of moles of solute dissolved per kilogram of solvent/ any 1
suitable definition 1
(b) Copper and Gold / any suitable example
18. 1+
(a) (b) 1

19. adenine, cytosine, uracil, and guanine. (if all bases are correct 1 mark) 1
uracil 1

20. (a) CH3CH2CH3 < CH3OCH3 < CH3CHO < CH3CH2OH 1

(b) Butanone < Propanone < Propanal < Ethanal 1
21. 1
2
1
2

174 | P a g e
22. �8�P�R�Y�Y
0 = 0.81 –(-2.36) = 3.17V 1
2

1
1
2

1
2

1
2

23. (a) 3-methyl butan-2-ol 1

1
(b) Toluene
(c) 1- methylcyclohexene 1
24. (a) 1
2
1
+
2

Cis isomer is optically active

(b) �a3 �R2 1
2�T �T

25. 1

26. (a) Chloroacetic acid is strong acid than acetic acid due to –I effect of Cl atom 1
which increases the
stability of conjugate ion. 1
(b) or any specific reaction

1
(c)

175 | P a g e
27. 1
2

1
2
(a)
1

(b)
28. (a) 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

(a) The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction
mixture is known as collision frequency (Z) 1

29. a. [Co(NH3)4(H2O)Cl]Cl2 1
b. Coordination number of Co=6 1
c. Aqueous solution of [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4 gives white precipitate when BaCl2 1+
solution is added to it and no reaction in case of [Co(NH3)5SO4]Br due to 1
absence of �F�B42− 𝑖�\�[�`. / Aqueous solution of [Co(NH3)5SO4]Br gives yellow
precipitate when dil. HNO3 and AgNO3 solution is added to it and no reaction in
case of [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4 due to absence of �5�_− 𝑖�\�[�` / any suitable test
(or) 1
2
Hybridization: d2sp3 Shape: Octahedral +1
Magnetic behaviour: Diamagnetic 1
2

30. a. Mercury cell. 1

b. Because CH3COOH is a weak electrolyte and degree of
1
dissociation/ionization increases
with dilution/ any suitable reason
(or)
No. Copper in copper sulphate is displaced by zinc.
c. Given : E° = 1.1V, F = 96,500 C mol-1, n = 2 2
Zn + Cu2+ ⇌ Cu + Zn2+
Using ΔG° = -nFE° = -2 × 96500 × 1.1 = 212,300 Jmol-1
31. (a) Both Ti3+ and Cu2+ have 1 unpaired electron, so the magnetic moment for
both will be 1.73 BM
(b) Zn, it has a more negative electrode potential so will corrode itself in
place of
iron.
(c) Mn+ has 3d54s1 configuration and configuration of Cr+ is 3d5,
therefore, ionisation enthalpy of Mn+ is lower than Cr+.
(d) Sc and Zn both form colourless compound and are diamagnetic.

176 | P a g e
 (e) The decrease in the atomic and ionic radii with increase in atomic
number of actinoids due to poor shielding effect of 5f electron.
(f) their ability to adopt multiple oxidation states and to form complexes
(any correct reason)
(g)
32.
1

(or) 1
(a) ‘B’ upon heating with Br2 and KOH forms a compound ‘C’. The compound
‘B’ is expected to be an acid amide. Since ‘B’ has been formed upon heating
compound ‘A’ with aqueous ammonia, the compound ‘A’ is an aromatic
acid. It is benzoic acid. The reactions involved are given as follows:

1x
3

(b)

33. (a) the solubility of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional to the partial 1
pressure of the gas present above the surface of liquid or solution / “the
partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase (p) is proportional to the mole
fraction of the gas (x) in the solution”
(b)
Ideal solution Non ideal solution
1
obey Raoult’s law do not obey Raoult’s law
2
ΔHmix = 0 ΔHmix ≠ 0 1
+
(any two differences) 2

177 | P a g e
(c) ΔTb= i x Kb x m ½
For MgSO4 ,i=2 ½
4𝑋 10 1
Molality of solution= =1/ 3m
120 ½
ΔTb= 2 x 0.52 x 1/3 = 0.347 ½
Boiling point of solution= 100+0.347=100.3470C
(Or) 1
(a) The binary mixtures of liquids having same composition in liquid and
vapour 1
phase and boil at a constant temperature are called azeotropic mixture.
(b) Water from NaCl solution passes into cells &they swell 1
(c)
½
½
25 450
�[2 = 180 = 0.139 �[1 = 18
= 25
17.5−�]1 0.139 1
=
17.5 0.139+25
17.5−�]1
= 0.0055
17.5
�]1 = 17.403 mm Hg (correct unit ½ mark)

KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN, BENGALURU REGION

178 | P a g e
 CLASS XII
SAMPLE PAPER-III
CHEMISTRY (THEORY)
S.No Chapter MCQ VSA I SA I Case LA Total
A/R Based wt
1 1 2 3 4 5
Marks Marks Marks
Marks Marks Marks
1 Solutions 1 1 2(7)

2 Electrochemistry 1 1 1 1 4(9)

Chemical 2 1 1 4(7)
3
Kinetics

4 d -and f -Block 2 1 2(7)

Elements
5 Coordination 1 1 2(7)
Compounds

6 Haloalkanes and 1 1 1 4(6)

Haloarenes

7 Alcohols, Phenols 2 1 1 3(6)

and Ethers
Aldehydes, 2 1 1 3(8)
8 1
Ketones and
Carboxylic Acids

9 Amines 1 1 3(6)

10 Biomolecules 1 1 1 1 4(7)

Total 12 (1) 4(1) 5(2) 7(3) 2(4) 3(5) 33(70)

179 | P a g e
General Instructions:
Read the following instructions carefully and follow them :
(i) This question paper contains 33 questions. All questions are compulsory.
(ii) Question paper is divided into FIVE sections-A,B,C,D and E.
(iii) SECTION A -Q.No 1 to 16 are multiple choice type questions. Each question
carries 1 mark.
(iv) SECTION B- Q.No 17 to 21 are very short answer type questions. Each question
carries 2 marks.
(v) SECTION C- Q.No 22 to 28 consists of 7 are short answer type questions. Each
question carries 3 marks.
(vi) SECTION D- Q.No 29 and 30 are case- based questions. Each question carries 4
marks.
(vii) SECTION E- Q.No 31 to 33 are long answer type questions. Each question carries
5 marks.
(viii) There is no overall choice given in the question paper. However, an internal
choice has been provided in few questions in all the sections except Section-A.
(ix) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION-A
Q No. 1 to 16 are Multiple Choice type questions carrying 1 mark each.

1 Number of Faradays (F) required to reduce 1 mole of MnO4– ion into Mn2+ are 1
(a) 7F (b) 2F (c) 1F (d) 5F

2 The half-life of a first order reaction is 69.35 s. The value of rate constant of 1
the reaction is
(a) 1.0 s−1 (b) 0.1 s−1 (c) 0.01 s−1 (d) 0.001 s−1

3 A plot is shown below between concentration and time t. Which of the given 1
order is indicated by the graph

(a) Zero Order (b) Second Order (c) First Order (d) Fractional Order

4 The magnetic nature of elements depends on the presence of unpaired 1

electrons. Identify the configuration of transition element, which shows
highest magnetic moment.
(a) 3d7 (b) 3d5 (c) 3d8 (d) 3d2

180 | P a g e
5 Which reagent will you use for the following reaction? 1
CH3CH2CH2CH3 → CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl + CH3CH2CHClCH3
(a) Cl2/UV light (b) NaCl + H2SO4
(c) Cl2 gas in presence of Fe in dark (d) Cl2 gas in dark

6 Which of the following pairs of ions have the same electronic configuration? 1
(a) Cu2+, Cr2+ (b) Fe3+, Mn2+ (c) Co3+ ,Ni3+ (d) Sc3+, Cr3+

7 Phenol is less acidic than: 1

(a) Ethanol (b) o-nitrophenol (c) o-methyl phenol (d) o-methoxyphenol

8 A tertiary alcohol is obtained by the reaction of Grignard reagent with: 1

(a) Butanone (b) Propanone (c) Acetone (d) All of the above

9 The IUPAC name of CH3-CH=CH-CHO is: 1

(a) Buten-2-al (b) Butenal (c) But-2-enol (d) But-2-enal

10 An organic compound X on treatment with pyridinium chlorochromate in 1

dichloromethane gives compound Y. Compound Y reacts with I2 and alkali to
form triiodo methane. The compound ‘X’ is:
(a)CH3CH2OH (b)CH3CHO (c)CH3COCH3 (d)CH3COOH

11 The correct order of the basic strength of methyl substituted amines in 1

aqueous solution is:
(a) CH3NH2 > (CH3)2NH > (CH3)3N
(b) (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2 > (CH3)3N
(c) (CH3)3N >CH3NH2 > (CH3)2NH
(d) (CH3)3N > (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2

12 Which of the following statements are not true about glucose? 1

(a) It is an aldohexose (b) On heating with HI, it forms n-hexane
(c) It is present in furanose form (d) It does not give 2,4-DNP test

For Q No. 13 to 16, two statements are given-one labelled as

Assertion(A) and the other labelled as Reason(R). Select the most
appropriate answer from the options given below:
(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation of A.
(c) A is true but R is false.
(d) A is false but R is true.

181 | P a g e
13 Assertion(A): Rate constant of a zero-order reaction has the same unit as the 1
rate of a reaction.
Reason(R): Rate constant of a zero-order reaction does not depend upon the
concentration of the reactant.

14 Assertion(A): Tertiary alcohols get converted into an alkene instead of a carbonyl 1

compounds in the presence of heated metallic copper.
Reason(R): Tertiary alcohols prefer to undergo dehydrogenation instead of
dehydration in the presence of heated copper.

15 Assertion (A): For a Daniel cell, Zn(s)/Zn2+ (1.0M) // Cu2+(1.0M)/Cu(s) with 1

Eocell=1.1V, if the external opposing potential is more than1.1V, the electrons
flow from Cu to Zn.
Reason(R): Cell acts like a Galvanic cell.

16 Assertion(A): Benzoic acid does not undergo Friedel Craft’s reaction. 1

Reason(R): Carboxyl group is deactivating and the catalyst aluminium chloride
gets bonded to the carboxyl group.
SECTION B

17 Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in a solution containing 30% by mass of 2

it in CCl4.

18 Explain pseudo-order reaction with an example. 2

19 Which one in the following pairs of substances undergoes SN2 substitution 2

reaction faster and why?

20 (a) Define Glycosidic linkage. 2

(b) Why cannot vitamin C be stored in our body.
OR
(i) What type of linkage is present in nucleic acids?
(ii) Give one example each for fibrous protein and globular
protein.

21 Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their property 2

indicated.
) CH3COCH3, C6H5COCH3, CH3CHO (reactivity towards nucleophilic addition
reaction)
i) Cl-CH2-COOH, F-CH2-COOH, CH3 -COOH (acidic character)

182 | P a g e
 SECTION C

22 When a certain conductivity cell was filled with 0.1 M KCl, it has a resistance 3
of 85 ohms at 25°C. When the same cell was filled with an aqueous solution of
0.052 M unknown electrolyte, the resistance was 96 ohms. Calculate the molar
conductivity of the electrolyte at this concentration. Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl
= 1.29 × 10−2Ω−1cm−1

23 Write the formula of the following coordination compound: 3

Iron(III)hexacyanoferrate(II).
What type of isomerism is exhibited by the complex [Co(NH3)5Cl]SO4?
Write the hybridisation and number of unpaired electrons in the
complex [CoF6]3-. (Atomic Number of Co =27)
OR
(i) What is meant by crystal field splitting energy?
(ii) On the basis of crystal field theory, write the electronic configuration
of d4 in terms of t2g and eg in an octahedral field when
(a) Δ0 > P (b) Δ0 < P

24 The rate constant of a reaction at 400K and 200K are 0.04 and 0.02 s-1 3
respectively. Calculate the value of activation energy
(log2 =0.3010; R = 8.314 JK-1mol-1)

25 Below, reactants of some organic name reactions are given. Write the 3
structure of the main product in each and also identify the name reaction.
(Any 3)

26 Write mechanism of hydration of ethene to yield ethoxyethane. 3

27 What happens when D-glucose is treated with the following reagents? 3

(i) HI
(ii) Bromine water
(iii) HNO3

28 Compound ‘A’ with molecular formula C4H9Br is treated with aq. KOH solution.
The rate of this reaction depends upon the concentration of the compound ‘A’
only. When another isomer ‘B’ of this compound was treated with aq. KOH
solution, the rate of reaction was found to be dependent on concentration of 3
compound and KOH both.
(i) Write down the structural formula of both the compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’.
(ii) Out of these two compounds, which one will be optically active?

183 | P a g e
 SECTION D

29 Read the given passage and answer the questions that follows.
Negative ion or Neutral molecule which bound to the metal ion by secondary
valency is called as ligand. In a complex, metal ion acts as Lewis acid and ligand
acts as Lewis base. Ligands are classified according to number of electron pair
in them. The ligand which can donate one electron pair to the metal atom is
called unidentate ligand. The ligand which can donate two electron pairs to the
Metal ion is called bidentate ligand. The ligand in which two or more
coordination sites are there is called polydentate ligand. Polydentate ligand
forms cyclic structure with metal ion and form Chelate.
i) Give an example of unidentate neutral ligand. 1
ii) What are Lewis acids and Lewis bases?. 1
iii) How bidentate and Ambidentate ligands are different? Give example. 2
OR
What are chelate ligands? Give an example.

30 Molar conductivity for weak electrolytes can be obtained from molar

conductivities of strong electrolytes at infinite dilution by doing algebraic
addition. For example, molar conductivity of weak electrolyte like CH 3COOH can
be obtained from molar conductivities at infinite dilution of strong electrolytes
like CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl according to Kohlrauch’s law
Λ°mCH3COOH= [Λ°mCH3COO- + Λ°mNa+] + [ Λ°mH ++ Λ°mCl- ]-[ Λ°m Na+ + Λ°mCl- ]
(i) What is the expression of Λ°m for an electrolyte AmBn? 1
(ii) Define limiting molar conductivity.
(iii) Calculate Λ°m for AgCl if Λ°m (AgNO3) = 133.4, Λ°m(KCl)=149.9, 1
Λ°m(KNO3)=144.9 Scm2mol-1 2
OR
Calculate Λ°m for HAc if Λ°m (HCl) = 425.9, Λ°m(NaCl)=126.4,
Λ°m(NaAc)=91.0 Scm2mol-1

SECTION E

31 a) Complete the following ionic equations:

i) Cr2O7 2- (aq) + I– (aq) + H+ (aq) →
2
ii) Fe2+ (aq) + MnO4 - (aq) + H+ (aq) →
(b) Explain the following observations: 3
(i) In general, the atomic radii of transition elements decrease with atomic
number in a given series.
(ii) The E°M 2+/M, for copper is positive (+ 0.34 V). It is the only metal in the first
series of transition elements showing this type of behaviour.
(iii) The E° value for Mn3+/Mn2+ couple is much more positive than for Cr3+/Cr2+
or Fe3+/ Fe2+ couple.
OR
Assign reasons for the following:
a) The enthalpies of atomization of transition elements are high. 1
b) The transition metals and many of their good catalysts. Compounds act as 1
c) E°M2+/M values are not regular for first-row transition metals (3d series). 1
d) Although ‘F’ is more electronegative than ‘O’, the highest Mn fluoride is MnF4, 1
whereas the highest oxide is Mn2O7 1
e) Sc3+ is colourless in an aqueous solution whereas Ti3+ is coloured.

184 | P a g e
32 A colourless substance ‘A’ (C6H7N) is sparingly soluble in water and gives a water 3
soluble compound ‘B’ on treating with HCl. On reacting with CHCl3 and
alcoholic KOH ‘A’ produces an obnoxious smell due to the formation of
compound ‘C’. Reaction of ‘A’ with benzene sulphonyl chloride gives compound
‘D’ which is soluble in alkali. ‘A’ reacts With NaNO2 and HCl, to form compound
‘E’. Identify compounds ‘A’ to ‘E’. 2
OR
a) Why is benzene diazonium chloride not stored and used immediately
after its preparation? 5
b) Explain why MeNH2 is a stronger base than MeOH?
c) What is the role of pyridine in the acylation reaction of amines?
d) Give one chemical test to distinguish between Aniline and
benzylamine
e) Give a suitable reaction to convert aniline to bromobenzene, name the
reaction also.

33 (i) Define the following terms:

(a) Azeotrope (b) Osmotic pressure (c) Colligative properties
3
(ii) Calculate the molarity of 9.8% (w/w) solution of H2SO4 if the density of the
solution is 1.02 g mL–1. (Molar mass of H2SO4 = 98 g mol–1) 2
OR
(i) On mixing liquid X and liquid Y, the volume of the resulting solution
decreases. What type of deviation from Raoult’s law is shown by the resulting 2
solution? What change in temperature would you observe after mixing liquids X
and Y?
(ii) What happens when we place the blood cell in water (hypotonic solution)? 3
Give reason.
(iii) At 25°C the saturated vapor pressure of water is 3.165 kPa (23.75 mm Hg).
Find the saturated vapor pressure of a 5% aqueous solution of urea (carbamide)
at the same temperature. (Molar mass of urea = 60.05 g mol–1)

185 | P a g e
 MARKING SCHEME
CHEMISTRY (Theory)
SAMPLE PAPER NO.3

Q.No. Value Point/ Expected Answer Marks

1 (d) 5F 1

2 (c) 0.01 s−1 1

3 (c) First Order 1

4 (b) 3d5 1

5 (a) Cl2/UV light 1

6 (b) Fe3+, Mn2+ 1

7 (b) o-nitrophenol 1

8 (d) All of the above 1

9 (d) But-2-enal 1

10 (a)CH3CH2OH 1

11 (b) (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2 > (CH3)3N 1

12 (c) It is present in furanose form 1

13 a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A 1

14 c. A is true but R is false. 1

15 c. A is true but R is false. 1

16 a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A 1

17 nC6H6=30g/78g=0.385mol ½
nCCl4=70g/154g=0.454mol ½
X C6H6= nC6H6/nC6H6 + nCCl4
=0.385 mol /0.385mol + 0.454mol = 0.459 1

186 | P a g e
18 The reaction which appears to be second order behaves as first order 1
reaction is called pseudo-order reaction.
1
Ex: C12H22O11 + H2O → C6H12O6(Glucose) + C6H12O6 (Fructose)

19 1

20 (a) The linkage between two monosaccharides through oxygen atom 1

in an oligosaccharide or a polysaccharide is known as glycosidic
linkage.
(b) As vitamin C is water soluble, therefore, it is readily excreted in 1
urine and hence cannot be stored in the body.
OR
(i) Phosphodiester linkage. 1
(ii) Fibrous protein: Myosin, keratin, collagen, etc.
Globular protein: Insulin, haemoglobin, etc. ½, ½

21 (i) C6H5COCH3 < CH3COCH3 < CH3CHO 1

(ii) CH3 -COOH < CI-CH2-COOH < F-CH2-COOH 1

22

23 Fe4[Fe(CN)6]3 1
Ionisation isomerism. Its ionisation isomer will be 1
[Co(NH3)5(SO4)]Cl.
Hybridisation – sp3d2, number of unpaired electron= 4. ½, ½
OR
(i) The difference between energies of two sets of d-orbitals t2g and
1
eg is called crystal field splitting energy (Δ0).
(ii) (a) If Δ0 > P, the configuration will be t2g4, eg0. Ligands will 1
produce strong field and pairing takes place.
(b) If Δ0 < P, the configuration will be t2g3, eg1. Ligands will 1
produce weak field and no pairing takes place.

187 | P a g e
24 ½

25 1x3

26 1x3

27 1
1

28 A is 1-Bromo butane. 1
B is 2-Bromo butane. 1
B is optically active. 1

188 | P a g e
29 i) Ammine NH3 1
ii) Lewis acids are electron pair acceptor whereas Lewis bases are 1
electron pair donor.
iii) Bidentate ligand- those which bind to the metal ion through two 1+1
donor atoms. Eg. Ethane 1-2 diamine [H2NCH2CH2NH2].
Ambidentate ligands – those ligands which have two donor sites
but at a time only one atom binds to the metal Eg- NO2-
OR
When a ligand attaches to the metal ion in a manner that it forms
a ring, then the metal-ligand association is found to be more stable. 1+1
For example [Co(en)3]3+ is more stable than [Co(NH3)6]3+.

30 (i) mΛ°An+ + nΛ°Bm- 1

(ii) Limiting molar conductivity is the molar conductivity at infinite 1
dilution or at zero concentration
(iii) Λ°mAgCl = (Λ°mAgNO3 + Λ°mKCl) - Λ°m KNO3 1
=(133.4+149.9)-144.9 ½
= 138.45 Scm2 mol-1 ½
OR
Λ°mHAc = (Λ°mNaAc + Λ°mHCl) - Λ°m NaCl 1
= (91.0+425.9)-126.4 ½
= 390.5 Scm2 mol-1 ½

31 (a) (i) 5Fe2+ (aq) + MnO4- (aq) + 8H+ (aq) → Mn2+ (aq) + 5Fe3+ (aq) + 4H2O(l) 1
(ii) Cr2O7 2- (aq) + 6I– (aq) + 14H+ (aq) → 2Cr3+(aq) + 3I2 (s) + 7H2O(l) 1

b) (i) Because of increase in effective nuclear charge and weak shielding effect 1
of d electrons, the atomic radii decreases.
(ii) It is because Copper has high enthalpy of atomization and low enthalpy
of hydration. The high energy required to transform Cu(s) to Cu2+(aq) is not 1
balanced by its hydration enthalpy.
(iii)The large positive E° value for Mn3+|Mn2+ shows that Mn2+ is much 1
more stable than Mn3+ due to stable half-filled configuration (3d5).
Therefore the 3rd ionization energy of Mn will be very high and Mn3+ is
unstable and can be easily reduced to Mn2+. E° value for Fe3+|Fe2+ is
positive but small i.e. Fe3+ can also be reduced to Fe2+ but less easily. Thus
Fe3+ is more stable than Mn3+
OR
(a) This is because transition elements have strong metallic bonds as they
have large number of unpaired electrons, therefore they have greater 1
interatomic overlap
(b)The catalytic activity of transition metals is attributed to the following
reasons 1
i) Because of their variable oxidation state, transition metals form unstable
intermediate compounds and provide a new path with lower activation

189 | P a g e
 energy for the reaction.
ii) In some cases, the transitions metal provides a suitable large surface area
with free Valencies on which reactants are adsorbed
(c) E°(M2+/M) values are not regular in the first transition series metals
because of irregular variation of ionization enthalpies (IE1 + IE2) and the 1
sublimation energies.
(d) Among transition elements, the bonds formed in +2 and +3 oxidation
states are mostly ionic. The compounds formed in higher oxidation states
are generally formed by sharing of d-electrons. Therefore, Mn can form 1
MnO4- which has multiple bonds also, while fluorine cannot form multiple
bonds.
(e) The absence of unpaired d-electron in Sc3+ whereas in Ti3+ there is one
unpaired electron or Ti3+ shows the d-d transition. 1

32 A= C6H5NH2 B=C6H5NH3+Cl- C=C6H5NC 1x5

D=N-phenylbenzenesulphonamide E=C6H5N2+Cl-
OR
a) Benzene diazonium chloride cannot be stored and is used immediately
after its preparation because of its unstable nature. With a slight increase 1x5
in temperature, it dissociates to give nitrogen gas.

b) Nitrogen is less electronegative than oxygen; therefore, lone pairs of

electrons on nitrogen are readily available for donation. Hence, MeNH2 is
more basic than MeOH.

c) Pyridine acts as an acceptor for the acid by-product formed in the

reaction. Thus, it removes the side product, i.e. HCl, from the reaction
mixture.

d) Azo dye Test

e) Step 1. Diazotization and step 2.Sandmeyer/Gattermann reaction

Cu2�5�_2 ,HBr Cu ,HBr
C6H5 N2Cl →⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5 Br + N2 C6H5 N2Cl →⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5 Br + N2

33 (i) (a) The binary mixtures of liquids having same composition in liquid and 1
vapour phase and boil at a constant temperature are called azeotropes.
1
(b) The excess of pressure which must be applied to the solution side to
prevent the passage of solvent into it through a semipermeable membrane is 1
called osmotic pressure.
(c) The properties of solutions which depend only on the number of solute
particles in the solution but independent of their nature are called colligative
properties.

190 | P a g e
 ½

½
½

1
1

OR 1
(i) The solution will show negative deviation from Raoult’s law. Temperature
will rise. 1
(ii) Due to osmosis water enters into the cell and blood cell will swell. ½
(iii) ½

191 | P a g e